HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2008-R0214 - Contract = Minnix Commercial Construction Inc.- "Simunition" Facility - 06/13/2008Resolution No. 2008-80214
June 13, 2008
Item No. 5.14
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the City Council of the City of Lubbock hereby authorizes and directs the
Mayor of the City of Lubbock to execute a construction Contract by and between the
City of Lubbock and Minnix Commercial Construction, Inc., of Lubbock, Texas, for
construction of a "Simunition" training facility for the Police Department per RFP 08-
717 -DD, which Contract and any associated documents, are attached hereto and made a
part of this Resolution for all intents and purposes.
Passed by the City Council this 13th day of
M
Rebecca
APPROVED AS TO CONVENT:
June , 2008.
e-1 ,A
TOM MARTIN, MAYOR
- -.' 'f'o - j �9�
Mark earwood
Assistant City Manager/Chief Information Officer
VED A�ORM:
/-,\ a
andiver, Attorney of Counsel
DDres/MinnixCommConst-PDtrainingFac08ConRes
June 3, 2008
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY
RFP-08-717-DD
Contract # 8428
Plans & Specifications may be obtained from
THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY
http://pr.thereproductioncompan
Phone: (806) 763-7770
"A City of Planned Progress "
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
SUITE 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13r" STREET
LUBBOCK, "TEXAS 79401
PH:(806)775-2168 FAX:(806)775-3326
http:Hpurchas ing.ci.l ubbock.tx.us
DATE ISSUED:
CLOSE DATE:
RFP 08-717-DD, Addendum 4 1
ADDENDUM # I
RFP 08-717-DD
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS
TRAINING FACILITY
April 18, 2008
May 14, 2008 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals
(RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements,
not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Offeror's attention is invited to M W M Architect's Addendum # 1, and Agnew Associate's Addendum
#1, attached.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Email to ddoss�_emvlubbock.us.
THANK YOU,
MAI04,,�'
Darlene Doss
Buyer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall
be the offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Buyer if any language, requirements, etc., or
any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single
source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Buyer no later than
five (5) business days prior to the proposal close date. A review of such notifications will be made.
RFP 08-7I 7-DDad I
VVM
architects
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
A SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE FIRING RANGE
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
ADDENDUM NO. 1
MWM Architect's Project No. 0707-2
NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS:
MWM Architects, Incorporated
2574-74"4 Street, Suite 201
Lubbock, Texas 79423
806.745.7707 Fax: 806.745.7620
March 28, 2007
THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE INCORPORATED IN AND BECOME A PART OF THE
ORIGINAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ABOVE REFERENCED
PROJECT DATED 3/3/2008. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS
ADDENDUM BY NOTING IT ON YOUR PROPOSAL.
1. In the Contract Documents, delete the Flagpole Alternate No. 1 Work.
2. For Clarification Purposes, It is the Intent of the Contract Documents that Door #4 is
a field painted steel sectional garage door with insulated slats/sections.
3. it is the Intent of the Contract Documents that four (4) Breech Doors (Door #2) shall
be part of the Work in the following locations:
a) Ram Door (which opens in) on the second floor on the west elevation at the top
of the stair;
b) Shotgun Door (which opens in) on the ground floor on the west elevation beneath
the second floor stair landing;
c) Pry Door (which opens out) on the ground floor on the east elevation;
d) Explosive Door (which opens in) on the ground floor on the south elevation.
4. In. thel Contract Documents,. add to each of the four (4) Breech Doors one (1)
aluminum framed storm door with safety glass and a door closer equal to Confort Blit
Highland Midview Storm Doors.
5. On the North Elevation, center the concrete garage door pad on the Garage Door
(Door #4). Then add a one bay wood framed, sloped roof carport cover similar to
the three (3) bay porch shown on the south elevation using the same materials,
details, framing and foundations designs.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
C f 1
ADDEND1-JM \UMBER U'\F
Pave i
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
Agnew Associates, Inc.
Project Number 1207068
MARCH 27, 2008
The seat appearing on this document was authorized by Reese Wright, PE 79808, on March 27, 2008. Alteration of a sealed
document without proper notification to the responsible engineer is an offense under the Texas Engineering Practice Act.
hU'1 tCE T'U AL BIDDERS:
The following shall lae incorporated in and become a part of the original Drawings and Specifications of
the above identified project. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum by noting it on your Proposal.
F.IR� CAL ll
Item 1. On the Drawings, Sheet E1.1, room 102, add one quadraplex receptacle on the north, south and
west walls (total of 3). Connect receptacles to circuit LPA-21.
Item 2. On the Drawings, Sheet E1.1, room 202, add one quadraplex receptacle on the north, south and
cast walls (total of 3). Connect receptacles to circuit LPA-22.
Item 3. On the Drawings, Sheet El.1, delete the exhaust fan noted by note 4 and the associated circuit
on the first and second floor. (total of two tans).
End of Addendum ONE
RFP# 08-717-DD. Addendum # 2
City of Lubbock
PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
ROOM 204, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13"' STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
1-, P14:(806)775-2168 FAX:(806)775-2164
littp://ptirchasing.ci.lLtbbock.tx.us
ADDENDUM # 2
RFP # 08-717-DD
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS
TRAINING FACILITY
DATE ISSUED: May 9, 2008
CLOSE DATE: May 14, 2008 @ 1:00 P.M.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for
Proposals (RFP). Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the
original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect.
I. Offeror's attention is invited to the questions and responses in the Engineer's Addendum #2,
attached.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed
to:
Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2168 or Email to DDos4 ri melubhock.us
THANK YOU,
Darlene Doss
Buyer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive
proposals. It shall be the offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Buyer if any
lan>:uaue, reuuirenients, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the
requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing
and must be received by the Buyer no later than five (5) business days prior to the proposal close
date. A review of such notifications will be made.
1
RFP-08-717-DDad2
ADDENDUM NO.2
City of Lubbock RFP-08-717-DD
MWM Architect's Project No. 0707-2
NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS:
MWM Architects, Incorporated
2574-74T Street, Suite 201
Lubbock, Texas 79423
806.745.7707 Fax: 806.745.7620
May 8, 2008
THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE INCORPORATED IN AND BECOME A PART OF THE ORIGINAL
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF THE ABOVE REFERENCED PROJECT DATED 302008.
PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM BY NOTING IT ON YOUR PROPOSAL.
The following Responses address the May 7, 2008 Questions:
1. "The Specifications Manual calls for end wall metal panels to be installed in the Gables. The
plans show Painted CMU all the way to the rake. Can you please verify we are running Painted
CMU all the way up to the rake of the roof?
RESPONSE — The load bearing CMU is shown correct on Sheet A3.1 — it is to be built up to the rake of
the second floor roof. The "end wall metal panels" referenced in the Specifications refers to the shed
roofed canopy end.wali gables of the canopy located on the south end of the CMU, two story building plus
the shed roofed canopy added to the Work as Addendum No. 1 — Item 95.
2. "The Specifications Manual calls for copper metal flashing at any exposed areas visible from
the ground. The Plans detail pre -painted metal flashing to match existing green metal paint
currently installed on the range roofs. Can you please verify the use of either copper flashing
or pre -painted metal flashing?"
RESPONSE — There is no copper flashing used in the Work. The "pre -painted metal flashing" matching
the green roof color shall be utilized.
3. "South Elevation on Sheet A3.1 Detail 1 shows a metal Fascia. All other details show a
painted 2X wood material Fascia. Can you please verify the use of either metal Fascia or
Painted 2X wood material- Fascia?"
RESPONSE — The 2X wood Fascia material shall not be painted. The Intent of the Contract Documents
shall be that a "pre -painted metal flashing/fascia" matching the green roof color shall be used to
completely cover the 2X wood fascia material. The gutters shall also be "pre -painted metal" matching the
green roof.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY
RFP-08-717-DD
Contract # 8428
Plans & Specifications may be obtained from
THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY
htlp://pr.therel2roductioncompany.com/
Phone: (806) 763-7770
"A City of Planned Progress"
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
Pate Intentionally Left Blank
CITY OF LUBBOCK
REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS
•m
TITLE:
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
RFP NUMBER: 08-717-DD
PROJECT NUMBER: 138.8302
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTING OFFICE
Pate Intentionally Left Blank
City of Lubbock, TX
Public Works Contracting Office
Contractor Checklist for
RFP-08-717-DD
Before submitting your proposal, please ensure you have completed and included the following:
I. Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM. Proposal submittal form MUST be completed in blue or
black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand.
Amounts shall be written in both words and numerals and in the event of a discrepancy the
amounts written in words shall govern. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify
addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL
SECURITY number.
2. Include PROPOSAL BOND or CASI IIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your proposal surety.
Failure to provide a proposal surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your proposal.
3. Clearly mark the proposal number, title, due date and time and your company name and address
on the outside of the envelope or container.
4. Ensure your proposal is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office
prior to the deadline. Late proposals will not be accepted.
5. Complete and submit the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications".
6. Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT.
This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original.
7. Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be
explained in detail and submitted with Proposal.
8. Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firm's
FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number.
9. Complete and submit a PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS.
DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN TWO BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING
1. Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS.
FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR PROPOSAL BEING
DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE
INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL.
(Type or Print Company Name)
INDEX
1. NOTICE TO OFFERORS
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
3. TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE § 271.116
4. PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL — (must be submitted by published due date & time)
4-1. LUMP SUM PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM
4-2. PROPOSAL BOND WITH POWER OF ATTORNEY OR CERTIFIED/CASHIER'S CHECK
4-3. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS
4-4. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
4-5. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE
4-6. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION
4-7. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS
5. POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS — (to be submitted no later than two business days
after the close date when proposals are due)
5-1. FINAL LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
6. PAYMENT BOND
7. PERFORMANCE BOND
8. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
9. CONTRACT
10. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
11. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
12. SPECIFICATIONS
NOTICE TO OFFERORS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
NOTICE TO OFFERORS
RFP-08-717-DD
Sealed proposals addressed to Darlene Doss, Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
Public Works Contracting Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401,
until 1:00 P.M. on May 14, 2008, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish
all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the
the Public Works Contracting Office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the proposer to
ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Buyer for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of
the date above first written.
Proposals are due at 1:00 P.M. on May 14, 2008, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider
the proposals on June 12, 2008, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon
thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any
formalities. The successful proposer will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter
2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price
exceeds $100,000 and the successful proposer will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with
Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said
contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best
Rating of "A" or better.
Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety
company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the
total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that proposer will enter into a contract and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to him.
FAILURE OF THE PROPOSER TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL
SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NONRESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN
DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL.
It shall be each proposer's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself
regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such
factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There
will be a non -mandatory pre -proposal conference on Apri130, 2008 at 9:00 A.M., in the Municipal Building,
Training Conference Center, Room TCLO1, 1625 131h Street, Lubbock, Texas.
Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102
Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at httl2://12r.therel2roductioncompany.com/. ONE SET OF PLANS AND
s SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE
REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770.
Deposit Checks shall be made payable to The City of Lubbock, and will be refunded if documents are returned
in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals. Additional sets of plans and
specifications may be obtained at the offeror's expense.
i
Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem
wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Public Works Contracting Officer of the
City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is
further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein
concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore
established by owner in said wage scale. r
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to
this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit
proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex,
disability, or national origin in consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre- 1
proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require
special assistance, please contact the Public Works Contracting Office at (806) 775-2168 or write to Post Office
Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. (_
CITY OF LUBBOCK
DARLENE DOSS,
BUYER
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
Pap,e Intentionally Left Blank
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS
1 PROPOSAL DELIVERY, TIME & DATE
The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish CONSTRUCT A
NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY per the attached specifications and contract
documents. Sealed proposals will be received no later than 1:00 P.M. CST, May 14, 2008 at the office
listed below. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned
unopened to the proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or
container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "RFP-08-717-DD Construct a New
Simunitions Training Facility "and the proposal opening date and time. Offeror's must also include
their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be
addressed to:
Darlene Doss, Buyer
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street, Room 204
Lubbock, Texas 79401
1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Public Works
Contracting Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or
r_
s delivered at all. If proposer does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort
of delivery service that provides a receipt.
1.2 Proposals will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by
private courier service. No proposals will be accepted by oral communication, telephone,
electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT
ACCEPT FAX PROPOSALS.
1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals
through an addendum.
2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING
2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing
addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) documents, a non-
mandatory pre -proposal meeting will be held at 9:00 A.M., April 30, 2008 in the Municipal
Building Training Conference Center Room TCLO1 1625-13 Street Lubbock Texas. All
-t persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective proposer
they represent.
2.2 It is the offeror's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not
mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre-
r proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting.
3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS
3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information
available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdepot.com. We strongly suggest that you check
for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline.
BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public
libraries.
3.2 Any offeror in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents
may request an interpretation thereof from the Public Works Contracting Office. At the request
of the offeror, or in the event the Public Works Contracting Office deems the interpretation to be
substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Public Works
Contracting Office. Such addenda issued by the Public Works Contracting Office will be
E_
.19
6
available over the Internet at http://www.RFPdepot.com and will become part of the proposal
package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL
EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request
for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by {
{
the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) days before the z
proposal closing date.
3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of
Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing.
Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Public Works Contracting Office in writing or
--
in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a proposer may
have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives
of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in
any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses.
3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors.
EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Each proposer shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with
all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of
these specifications.
4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each proposer shall be responsible for making all investigations
and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the
requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to make such investigations and
examinations shall not relieve the proposer from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all
provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals.
4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract
documents, shall be given to the Buyer and a clarification obtained before the proposals are
received, and if no such notice is received by the Buyer prior to the opening of proposals,
then it shall be deemed that the proposer fully understands the work to be included and
has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these
plans and specifications. If proposer does not notify the Buyer before offering of any
discrepancies or, omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed
that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days
prior to the opening of proposals.
PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS
5.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred
in the preparation and submission of a proposal.
5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any
services or equipment.
5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the proposer.
TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AT%1D THE TEXAS PUBLIC f
INFORMATION ACT
6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial
decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those
portions. -
6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and
decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of
2
whether a particular portion of your proposal is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial
information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney
General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is
received for a portion of your proposal that you have marked as being confidential information,
you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in
writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In
the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of
competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under
Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code,
then such information will be made available to the requester.
6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the
Texas Open Records Act.
7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES
The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the
proposer is or may be required to pay.
8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES
Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of
local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources.
9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
9.1 The proposer shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business
arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock.
9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the proposer certifies and represents to the City the offeror
has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the
receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation,
vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal.
10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described
in the General Conditions.
10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract
documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory
completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents.
11 PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the
project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents
and prepare a proposal without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be
examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors.
12 PROPOSER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS
12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive
proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Buyer if any language,
age,
requirements, etc.. or anv combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements
stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be
received by the City of Public Works Contracting Office no later than five (5) calendar days
before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made.
12.2 NO PROPOSER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL I
REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION
CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN
`VRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE
PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO:
Darlene, Doss
City of Lubbock
Public Works Contracting Office
1625 131h Street, Room 204
Lubbock, Texas 79401
Fax: 806-775-2164 or 806-767-2275
Email: ddoss(i n1y1ubbock.us
RFPDepot: http://www.RFPdepot.com
13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within
ONE HUNDRED EIGHTY (180) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified
in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful offeror.
13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing,
provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress
schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a
progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work
is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor
to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the
time specified. - I I-
14 PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General t-
Conditions of the contract documents.
15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor
to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the
improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no
claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and
grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some
detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for
protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a
representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying
with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents
provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory
prof ect.
4
17 GUARANTEES
17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed
against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall
furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall
remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever
resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final
acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner
(City of Lubbock).
17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor
represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and
date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all
hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract,
individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also,
the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any
way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option,
may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in
order to comply with all the obligations contained herein.
17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its
sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and
services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any
of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its
rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, it's right pertaining to
termination or default.
17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in
this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or
limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its
4 schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference.
18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to ten sets of plans and specifications and
related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during
construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute
copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper
prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all
materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of
&_ construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or
not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City
reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to
require of a proposer the following information:
(a) The experience record of the proposer showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one
covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage
completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the proposer.
(c) Equipment schedule.
E
5
20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX t
21
22
23
F
20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to
provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax pen -nit which shall enable him to
buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the- contract documents
in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility
lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during
the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees
that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has
knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned.
All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the
work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the
City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger
signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the
work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to
failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion
shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's
responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to
Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project.
EXPLOSIVES
23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the
Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of
explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a
direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized
to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the
Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or
corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated
by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having
structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's
intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the
companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury.
Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting
from his blasting operations.
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful proposer shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times
while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful proposer shall be required to furnish
the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time
that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
25 INSURANCE
25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance
as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized
.` to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be
furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided
ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on
the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at
his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter
specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance
shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas
and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the
Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of
each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be
submitted before contract execution.
25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN
THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE
CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A
PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION
IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE
ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE
CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR
PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE
INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE
FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
- 26.1 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this
project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem
i- wages as above mentioned. The proposer' attention is further directed to the requirements of
Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage
schedules above mentioned and the proposer's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the
f schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not
release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction
work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays
unless the following conditions exist:
26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the
s necessary service to its citizens.
26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The
Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show
he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
26.2 Bcforc construction work rcquiring an inspcctor is to be performed on weckcnds or holidays, the
Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to
the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's
Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work
a requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being
done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall
7
immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or
alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
27
PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the
project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable
without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors
engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file
with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall
contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of
pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no
rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages
paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications
set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the
contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf
this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar
day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in these contract documents.
PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price
due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be
rejected and returned to the proposer without being considered.
29 PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
29.1 The proposer shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the
form shall be correctly filled in and the proposer shall state the price both in words and numerals,
for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices
shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the
price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern.
29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and
address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm,
association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company
or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the
proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or
others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the
proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink.
29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to
Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
28.3.1 Proposer's name
28.3.2 Proposal for (description of the project).
29.4 Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for
opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that
has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the:proposal
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE
MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING.
-= 30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Proposer understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by proposer shall be bound and include
the following:
(a) Notice to Offerors.
(b) General Instructions to Offerors.
(c) Proposer's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors.
0) All other documents made available to proposer for his inspection in accordance with the Notice
to Offerors.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be
considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
31 QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS
The proposer may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of
the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the
service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The proposer may also be required to give a past
history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the proposer's qualifications. The
City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the
ability of the proposer to perform the work, and the proposer shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all
information for this purpose that may be requested. The proposer's proposal may be deemed not to meet
specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the
proposer fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the proposer is properly qualified to carry out the
obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the proposer's
qualifications shall include but not be limited to:
(a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service
required.
(b) The ability of the proposer to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time
specified, without delay or interference.
(c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the proposer.
(d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
(e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors
Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has
experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs
-; with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list
of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past three
9
32
33
34.
(3) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to
perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of
supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock
specifications herein.
BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA
The City of Lubbock will use the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by
the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The
selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal will include the following!
32.1 60% Price.
32.2 25% Contractor qualifications. Complete and submit the "Contractor's Statement of
Qualifications". City shall have an opportunity to interview the job superintendent at a time to be
named after receipt of proposals.
32.3 5% Safety Record Questionnaire.
32.4 10% Construction time.
The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is 300,000
Proposals shall be made using the enclosed Proposal Form.
SELECTION
33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most
advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in
this RFP.
33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY
AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR
PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL.
33.3 The -.City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection
criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected
offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or
time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate
a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that
offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or
all proposals are rejected.
33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may
consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria.
33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and may be rejected if it shows
omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu
of the items specified, if the unit prices are obviously unbalanced (either in excess of'or below
reasonably expected values), or irregularities of any kind. "
ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION
34.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN THE BID CLOSE DATE AND THE CONTRACT
AWARD, BIDDERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL
NOT DIRECTLY DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR PROPOSAL WITH ANY MEMBER OF
10
l
f -}
l_
THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -
SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS, UNLESS
REQUESTED BY THE CITY.
34.2 This provision is not meant to preclude offerors from discussing other matters with City Council
members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential
bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid
process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid.
II
Page Intentionally Left Blank
TEXAS LOCAL GOVERNMENT CODE 4 271.116
SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
§ 271.116.
SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS.
(a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction, rehabilitation, alteration,
r repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a
i7lemmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by this section.
(b) The goyernmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare construction
uments for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying
;h Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time
mployee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis
emonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code.
(c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor, the inspection
[,",e
"ces,the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for
ptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity. The governmental entity shall select those
ices for which it contracts in accordance with Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them
the request for proposals.
(d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes
onstruction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule, and other information that
itractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for
posals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror.
(e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if
are required to be stated, all prices stated in each proposal. Not later than the 45th day after the date of
lining the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to
published selection criteria.
(f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the governmental entity
ased on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The governmental entity shall first
.mpt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its engineer or architect
"`
y discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated
lith the modification. If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the
['lernmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next
cror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected.
(g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to
isidering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria.
Page Intentionally Left Blank
L
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL
Paze Intentionally Left Blank
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT
DATE: Mav 14. 2008
Fi PROJECT NUMBER: 08-717-DD - CONSTRUCT A NEW SINIUNiITIONS TRAINING FACILITY
Proposal of Minnix Commercial Partners, Limited (hereinafter called Offeror)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
b:- Ladies and Gentlemen:
The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the construction of a Construct a New Simunitions
Training Facility having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all
other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions
surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to
furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and
contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses
4 incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents.
BASE PROPOSAL "Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility" per plans and specifications.
MATERIALS: !ll/0riu/1a,-&ai 7-1-5OWto, ($ ad 60o )
SERVICES: 6IM2 dAzt- 'mod if �y 7'�IOf� (z x ($ 140
TOTAL BASE PROPOSAL: -i/Y'ee /fir"ed , fey@r111 &r 7lwznJ ($ .3 7y U4o )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. I� of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
ALTERNATE # 1: Provide an Alternate Price to add two flagpole bases and the installation of two (2) donated
flagpoles plus associated sidewalk paving around the flagpoles.
MATERIALS: N/A ($
SERVICES: ($
iv
TOTAL ALTERNATE #1: ($
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. in case of discrepancy, the amount shuwa in wui ds sliall govern-' )
�X�� Offeror's Initials
ALTERNATE #2: ADD - Provide an Alternate Price to add an eight (8) inch deep compacted
Caliche parking lot plus associated excavation/removal of six (6) inches of the parking lot
area.
MATERIALS; Ai* lees 7;2&,u fGzj %3, ow ) t
SERVI
TOTAL ALTERNATE #2: �I //// FUG &, row
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amou t shown in words shall govern.)
ALTERNATE #3: DEDUCT - Provide an Alternate Price to delete one (1) interior stair and associated
wall construction and the infill of the second floor with floor construction equal to the
adjacent second floor construction.
MATERIALS: V 1J MKl: fGf2,1
SERVICES:_/1( Wo )
TOTAL ALTERNATE #3:_ ]&e1yp zim-rG/a ($ /"I. dw )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Offeror hereby agrees to continence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to r
Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within (_J 5a ) # Days Completed by Contractor
( One Hundred Fifty Days_ ) (Written Days Completed by Contractor) da-s
thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner
as liquidated damages the sum of $ 250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) for each day in excess of the time set forth herein
above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors.
Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in
the proposing.
The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled
closing time for receiving proposals.
The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to '
commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he
has proposed; as provided in the contract documents.
Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of th,, total
amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that otTeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required instirance
policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
`:A/ Offeror's Initials
}
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars (S ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5'o Dollars
(S 50% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event
the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of
receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors.
Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE
PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL
SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING.
(Seal if Offeror is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary
Offeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. 1 Date 4-18-08
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Addenda No. Date
Date: May 14, 2008
.r
Authorizticf Si ature
Timothy J Minnix
(Printed or Typed Name)
Minnix Commercial Partners. Ltd.
Company
PO Box
64895
Address
Lubbock
Lubbock
City,
County
Texas
79464
State
lip Code
Telephone: 806
- 798-7335
Fax: 806-
722-3087
FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No.
20-1329184
M/WBE Firm: Woman Black American Native American
Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other S ecif
CITY OF LUBBOCK
CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS
RFP-08-717-DD
CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY
Candidates must complete each of the following items in order to be considered.
I.
2.
3.
4.
S.
FIRM NAME: Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd.
BUSINESS ADDRESS: PO Box 64895
Lubbock, Texas
79464
TELEPHONE, WITH AREA CODE: 806-798-7335
FAX WITH AREA CODE: 806-722-3087
E MAIL ADDRESS: lerry@minnixcomi)anies.com
INTERNETURLADDRESS: www.minnixcompanies.com
TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (CHECK ONE)
a. SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP ( )
b. PARTNERSHIP (X )
c. CORPORATION ( )
d. JOINT VENTURE ( )
PRINCIPALS (P) AND ASSOCIATES (A):
(WRITE "P" OR "A" FOR EACH)
DEGREE OR
NAME P/A CERTIFICATE INSTITUTION
a. Jerry Smith P
b. Jim McMillian A
c. Tim Minnix P
d. Rad Borg A BS Construction Engineering, Texas Tech Unix
e. Kim Chi twood A BS in Architecture, Texas Tech University
f. John Espinoza A
CITY OF LUBBOCK
CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS CONTINUED
l
6.
LIST 5 MAJOR PROJECTS WITHIN THE PAST THREE YEARS THAT ILLUSTRATE
YOUR
EXPERIENCE WITH PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE CITY'S.
PROJECT OWNER
YEAR
COST _
i_
a.
COL Fire Station 46 City of Lubbock
2006
1,184,134.06
b.
Hollands Office Supply Larry Holland
2007
328,155.00
c.
Tx Dot G66 Tech Lab State of Texas
2008
292,184.80
t-
d.
Texas Boys Ranch Texas Boys Ranch
2006
390,000.00
'
e.
Monterey C_h.u.rch of -Christ Monterey COC
2006
370.335.00
7.
REFERENCES:
(INCLUDE AT LEAST THREE REFERENCES FROM THREE PROJECTS SIMILAR TO THE ONE FOR
WHICH YOU ARE COMPETING)
NAME
RELATIONSHIP
PHONE NUMBER
a. Lynn Harms
President
762-0481
b. George L i senbe
Sail d ng . & . EUerrgX
775-2200
C. Larry Holland
Owner
79.5-9560
SUBMITTED BY:
Signature:
Date: May 14, 2008
Printed Name: Timothy J. Minnix _
Title: Owner
Firm Name: Minnix Commercial Partners, ltd.
Tel #: 806-798-7335
Address: PO Box 64895
City: Lubbock StateTX Zip: 79464
2
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Offeror and Agent
MuAt be submitted when Proposals are due.
1, the undersigned Offeror, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this proposal document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock,
I will be able to, within ten (10) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a'valid
insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this proposal.
N
a onuwwr (i )
Timot J. Minnix
Contractor (Print)
r-OWTRArTOR'STIMMNAME: Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd. _
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: pd Box 64895
Lubbock, Texas 79464
Name of Agent/Broker: o' Y/ u
Agent / Broker (Signature)
Address of Agent/Broker.
41�4
AgentlBroker Telepyhoon(er.
'Numbe
Date: .6 - V O
a NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
li,
If the time requirement specified above Is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the.
-contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact Buyer for
the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-216&
"ROPOSAL 09-717-DD - Construct it New Simunitions Training Facility
C
SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE
The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government
Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to
Section 252.6435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and
criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City contracts.
The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be:
The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may
consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by
environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among
other things:
a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC),
against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years.
b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within
the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. _
Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource
Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services
(DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies
of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or
regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of
violation, notices of enforcement, suspensiontrevocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines
assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final
orders, and judicial final judgments.
C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death.
d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the
offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe
environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock.
In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential
contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following
three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals:
QUESTION ONE
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such
firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years?
YES NO X
if the offeror has indicated TES lur question Imm-ibei one above, the olturo enlist provide to ity v• vriw ,
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation:
Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty
assessed.
fferor's Initials
QUESTION TWO
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such
firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or
regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement,
suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints,
indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments.
YES NO X
If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction:
Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and
penalty assessed.
QUESTION THREE
Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm,
corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which
resulted in serious bodily injury or death?
YES NO X
If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its
proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction:
Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty
assessed.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT t-
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my
statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be
investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected.
Signature
Owner
Title
SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION
Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or
making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are
suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of
$25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients).
Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and
its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency.
Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals
are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency.
I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither this firm nor its principals are suspended or
debarred by a Federal agency.
COMPANY NAME: Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd.
FEDERAL TAXED or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 20-1329184
Signature of Company Official:
Printed name of company official signing above: Timothy J . Mi nni x
Date Signed: May 14, 2008
6
PRELIMINARY LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Company Name and City
Minority Owned
Yes No
1.
Hallgren Company
0 ❑
2.
Overhead Door
❑ ❑
3.
R & R Ditching
❑ 0
4.
Llano Masonry
❑ 0
5.
CCP Painting
❑ ❑
6.
❑ ❑
7.
0 ❑
8.
❑ ❑
9.
0 ❑
10.
0 ❑
11.
❑ ❑
12.
❑ ❑
13.
0 0
14.
❑ 0
15.
0 ❑
16.
❑ ❑
THIS FORM SHALL BE SOMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL
IF NO SUBCONTACTORS WILL BE USED INDICATE SO
PROPOSAL 08-717-DD - Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility
7
POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS
The below -listed documents must be received in the Public Works Contracting Office
Not Later Than TWO BUSINESS DAYS after the close date when proposals are due.
FINAL LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Page Intentionally Left Blank
FINAL LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Company Name and City
Minority Owned
Yes
No
2.
3.
❑
4.
❑
❑
5.
6.
❑
❑
7.
8.
❑
❑
9.
❑
10.
11.
12.
13.
❑
❑
14.
15.
❑
16.
THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH INSURANCE
CERTIFICATES FOR EACH SUB -CONTRACTOR PURSUANT
TO SECTION
28G OF THE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PROPOSAL 08-717-DD - Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility
4
No Text
PERFORMANCE BOND
Pay-e Intentionally Left Blank
Bond No. S-905 8122
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000)
Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd.
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that / (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and
Washington International Insurance Compan
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
SX
Obligee), in the amount of Thr �.e g n n,iedaaniri t nn/ 1 M----- Dollars ($ 368, 000.00) lawful money of the
United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated thel3thday of
June ,2008,to Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility
and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
F ' NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall
faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall
be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be deternuned in accordance with the provisions of said
article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 17th
day of June , 2008.
Washing,zqn Inte do 1 nsurance Company
Surety
By. i
( re) a. Haock, Attorney -In -Fact
Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd.
(Company Name)
By
(Printed Name)
if aa�2r�
(Signature)
(Title)
The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
designates Kevin J. Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may
be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Washington I
surety
Cara D.'Hancock, Attorney -In -Fact
Approved as to Form
City of ck
By:
City Attorney
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
i_
PA
NAS SURETY GROUP
NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
r,
GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under
i--j laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International
Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca,
Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint:
KEVIN J. DUNN, CARA D. HANCOCK,
HAROLD D. BINGGELI and JENNIFER MADDEN
JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
i
Its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings
obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by
law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the
amount of. TWENTY-FIVE MILLION ($25,000,000.00) DOLLARS
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of
Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held
on the 24 h of March, 2000:
"RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any
Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power
of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to
attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be
binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached."
By
ci'o CO{tPORATE s,:
Stereo P. Anderson, President & Chief Executive officer of Washin on Internationalp y International Insurance Com ao &
W:•tom 1973 f,; rn� Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company ' = S E A I. s
i�
//1fl11111101\\\\ By
(i—.j/�rrnn� * nrs•`��,
David M. Layman, Vice President of Waington International Insurance Company &
Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their
C official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 3rd day of June 20 08 .
North American Specialty Insurance Company
Washington International Insurance Company
State of Illinois
County of Du Page ss:
On this 3rd day of June 200 before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson President and CEO of
Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman ,
Vice President of Washington Intemational Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company,
personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and
Lacknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies.
"OFFICIAL SEAL"
DONNAD. SKLENS
P01r, %ft of Mimi; My4Commimsi m mom 11%,0=1I Donna D. Sklens, Notary Public
I, James A. Cementer , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington
International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copyof a Power of Attorney given by said North'
American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 17th day of June , 20 0$_
�- �`
James A Carpenter. Vice President & Assistant Secretary of Washington International Insurance Company &
North American Specialty Insurance Company
PAYMENT BOND
No Text
Bond No. S-905 8122
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000)
KNOW'ALL'MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Minnix Commercial (hereinafter called the Principal(s),
Partners, Ltd.
as Principal(s), and Washington International Insurance Company
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), $lSuret (s),darebeld and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
~' Obligee), in the amount of re(KI
y e ght thousand & 00/i1Mlars ($368,000.00) lawful money of the
United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 13th day of
June 32008,to Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility
and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay
all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said
contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this
17th day of June 2008.
Washington International Insurance Company
Surety /;1
DA
Ca"ra,'DI Han&))-k, Attorney -In -Fact
8
Minnix Commercial Partners, Ltd.
(Company Name)
By f irrnd7"%%Y t ZX
(Printed Na
(Signature)
1
(Title)
The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
designates Kevin J . Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered
and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Washington International Insurance Company
Surety
t'
* By
(Title)
Cara D. Hancock, Attorney -In -Fact
Approved as to form:
City of b
By:
City Attorney
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
NAS SURETY GROUP
NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY
WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under
laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International
Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the City of Itasca,
7 Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint:
KEVIN J. DUNN, CARA D. HANCOCK,
HAROLD D. BINGGELI and JENNIFER MADDEN
JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
a Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings
obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by
law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the
amount of TWENTY-FIVE MILLION ($25,000,000.00) DOLLARS
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of
L� Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held
on the 24th of March, 2000:
"RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Executive Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any
Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power
of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to
_i attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be
binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached."
// RATE
ra��q�108A g
By
t r SEAL - Steven P. Anderson, President & Chief Executive Officer of washington International Insurance Company & � '
1073 � Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company sy A E )A
OM
r 411111B11N\\ By
L David M. Layman, Vice President of WnAiinglon International Insurance Company &
Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their
official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 3rd day of June 2008 .
North American Specialty Insurance Company
Washington International Insurance Company
State of Illinois
County of Du Page SS:
On this 3rd day of June 20 08 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared Steven P. Anderson , President and CEO of
Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company and David M. Layman ,
Vice President of Washington International Insurance Company and Vice President of North American Specialty Insurance Company,
personally known to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and
acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies.
"OFFICIAL SEAL"
DONNA D. SKLENS
Notary Public, State of Mom
My Commission Rom I1V06>2011
Donna D. Sklens, Notary Public
I, James A. Carnenter , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington
International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North
American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 17th day of June 20 08
James A. Carpenter, Via President & Assistant Secretary of Washington Intemmbonal Insurance Company &
North American Specialty Insurance Company ..
IMPORTANT NOTICE
In order to obtain information or make a complaint:
You may contact Jim Carpenter, Vice President -
Claims, at 1-800-338-0753.
You may call Washington International Insurance
Company and/or North American Specialty
Insurance Company's toll -free number for
information or to make a complaint at:
1-800-338-0753
You may also write to Washington International
Insurance Company and/or North American
Specialty Insurance Company at the following
address:
1200 Arlington Heights Road #400
Itasca, IL 60143
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance
to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights
or complaints at:
1- 800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
Fax: (512) 475-1771
Web: http://www.tdi.slate.tx.us
E-mail:
ConsumerProtection(&_tdi.state.tx.us
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES:
Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or
about a claim you should first contact the Washington
International Insurance Company and/or North
American Specialty Insurance Company. If the
dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas
Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY:
This notice is for information only and does not become
a part or condition of the attached document.
I.
AVISO IMPORTANTE
Para obtener informacion o para someter un queja:
Puede comunicarse con Jim Carpenter, Vice
President - Claims, al 1-800-338-0753.
Usted puede llamr al numero de telefono gratis de
Washington International Insurance Company
and/or North American Specialty Insurance
Company's para informacion o para someter una queja
al:
1-800-338-0753
Usted tambien puede escribir a Washington
International Insurance Company and/or North
American Specialty Insurance Company al:
1200 Arlington Heights Road #400
Itasca, IL 60143
Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas
para obtener informacion acerca de companias,
coberturas, derechos o quejas al:
1-800-252-3439
Puede escribir al Departmento de Seguros de Texas:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
Fax: (512) 475-1771
'Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us
E-mail:
ConsumerProtectionAtdi.state.tx.us
DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS:
Si tiene una disputa concemiente a su prima o a un
reclamo, debe comunicarse con el Washington
International Insurance Company and/or North
American Specialty Insurance Company primero. Si
no se resuelve la disputa, puede entonces comunicarse
con el Departmento de Seguros de Texas.
UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA:
Este aviso es solo para proposito de infromacion y no se
converte en parte o condicion del documento adjunto.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
Page Intentionally Left Blank
6/16/2008 1:40 PM FROM: Fax DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY, LLP TO: 7989761 PAGE: 001 OF 002
ACORD,�
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
DATE(MMIDDNYYY)
06/03/2008
PRODUCER (806) 794-1177
DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY, LLP
5233 79TH
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
LUBBOCK
TX 79424—
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
NAIC #
INSURED
INSURER A: UNIVERSAL CASUALTY
MINNIX COMMERCIAL PARTNERS, LTD
INSURER B. TEXAS MUTUAL
BOX 64895
INSURER C: GREAT A 4FAICAN
INSURER D: UNION STANDARD
LUBBOCK
TX 79464—
INSURERE:
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY
REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,
THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.
AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR
LTR
ADD11
INSRD
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE (MMIDDIYY)
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MMIDDIYY)
LIMITS
A
X
GENERAL LIABILITY
ACTUAL CERT. TO FOLLOW
08/28/2007
08/28/2008
EACH OCCURRENCE
$ 1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL -GENERAL LIABILITY
CLAIMS MADE Q OCCUR
FROM THE COMPANY
/ /
/ /
DAMAGETORENTED
PREMISES Eaocarrerlca
$ 50, OOO
MED EXP (Any one person)
$ 1,000
X BLANKET ADDITIONAL
PERSONAL &ADV INJURY
$ 1,000,000
INS./WAIVER OF BOB.—
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$ 2,000,000
1996 ISO FORM
/ /
/ /
GE N'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:
X I POLICY ACT LOC
PRODUCTS - COMPA0P AGG
$ 2,000,000
D
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
X ANYAUTO
CAA4287294
08/28/2007
08/28/2008
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
(Ea accident)
$ 1,000,000
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED AUTOS
/ /
/ /
BODILY INJURY
(Per person)
$
HIREDAUTOS
NON -OWNED AUTOS
/ /
/ /
BODILY INJURY
(Per accident)
$
PROPERTY DAMAGE
(PeracddeM)
$
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY -EAACCIDENT
$
L
I ANY AUTO
/ /
/ /
OTHER THAN EAACC
$
AUTO ONLY: AGG
$
EXCESSNMBRELLA LIABILITY
/ /
/ /
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
AGGREGATE
_
$
OCCUR CLAIMS MADE
DEDUCTIBLE
/ /
/ /
$
RETENTION $
$
B
WORKERS COMPENSA71ON AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
TSF1095348
01/01/2008
01/01/2009
1 TORYLBdITS ER
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
$ 500,000
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE
OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED?
If yes, describe under
MODIFIER 1.00
/ /
% /
E.L"DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE
$ 500,000
E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT
$ 500,000
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below
C
OTHER INLAND MARINE
IMP5327361-incs
05/11/2008
05/ 11/2009
25,000
leased equipment--
monthly report
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSA.00ATIONSNEHICLESIEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS
BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON THE COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
BLANKET WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON THE WORKERS COMPENSATION AND GENERAL LIABILITY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ON
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY SUBJECT TO WRITTEN CONTRACT. PRIMARY AND NON CONTRIBUTORY ADDITIONAL INSURED SUBJECT TO
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SECTION IV OF GENERAL CONDITIONS. **SIMUNITIONS TRAINING CENTER
SHOULD ANY •OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
"
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
-
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT
CITY OF LUBBOCK
FAILURE TO 00 SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE "
BOX 2000
INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
LUBBOCKTX 79453—
t) V
1" V!Iuo) 0ACORD CORPORATION 1988
"4ni INS025 (0108).05 ELECTRONIC LASER FORMS, INC. - (800)327-0545 Page 1 of 2
6/16/2008 1:40 PM FROM: Fax DAVID TATE INSURANCE AGENCY, LLP TO: 7989761 PAGE: 002 OF 002
II►51101Af,11•k�
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this
certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an
endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such
endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing
insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively
amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001108)
T,;. INS025(0108).05
Page 2 of 2
CONTRACTORCHECKLIST
1
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based
on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after
the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF
SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE
ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON
THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S
RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE
DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see.
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee." ;
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
_J
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for
the duration of the project; -'
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this r
rule; t-
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
t_
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; andLi
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.
4
CONTRACT
Commercial Construction
Commercial Remodeling
Construction Management
Multi -family Residential
May 26, 2008
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street
Lubbock, Texas 79401
///t*\t
MINNIX
COMMERCIAL
Re: RFP #08-717-DD
Construct a New Simunitions Training Facility
Attn: George Lisenbe
George,
Below is a list of items we can provide deductions through value engineering or price
reductions for the above project:
1. Reduce testing allowance $ 2,000.00
2. Change galvanized stairs and rails to painted stairs 4,000.00
Total Deduction ($ 6,000.00)
Please give me a call if you have any questions.
Thank you,
M' nix Commercial
t r'J y 3mith
Managing Partner
v
Post Office Box 64895 - Lubbock, Texas 79464. 806-798-7335 Office - 806-722-3087 Fax
email: mxcomm@minnixcompanies.com - www.minnixcompanies.com
CONTRACT #8428
STATE OF TEXAS
t COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 131h day of June 2008 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Minnix Commercial Partners, LTD. of the City of LUBBOCK, County of
LUBBOCK and the State TEXAS hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
PROPOSAL 08-717-DD - CONSTRUCT A NEW SIMUNITIONS TRAINING FACILITY $368,000
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents
as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Minnix Commercial Partners LTD 's proposal dated MAY 14,
2008 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance
with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to
make payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
CONTRACTOR: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS (OWNER):
'1�1 iUNI,x C'0/Yt�2��CC PAA??�LFT5i. L %f�, By: s�
MAYOR
By: — - ATTEST -
PRINTED NAM : i/MA /a lYtiNN
TITLE:
City Secretary
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Company r l'
Address U .Sm
City, State, Zip �, 'Td�C,�j 7992T_
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
APPROVED_AS TO CONTENT:
Owner's Representative
el 4 4
Dire or
APPR ]' OF
City ttorney
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
Page Intentionally Left Blank
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City
of Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit Minnix Commercial Partners LTD. who has agreed to perform the work
embraced in this contract, or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative WESLEY D. EVERETT DIRECTOR OF FACILITIES
MANAGMENT, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors,
architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this
agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's
Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal,
t Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to
Offeror for x inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed,"
or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
"Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the
Owner's Representative.
SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s).
WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the
last business address known to the party who gives the notice.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workinanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials
or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
q � p Y Y b
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE I
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed
work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's
Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's
Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's
failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents
or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall
suspend its work in order to pen -nit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension
will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor
shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the tune and place where lines and grades will be needed.
All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or
removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the
Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the
authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the
contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds
of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said
work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
-_; by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem
proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is
furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all
reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper
inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of
any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are
consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however,
should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor
may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the
absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be
deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to
Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given
to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision
by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work
and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the
terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
(_, Representative and Contractor.
19
20
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
CHARACTER OF WORKERS
F
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
�1
CONSTRUCTION PLANT '
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution
and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and
it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or
protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and
accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the �-
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such t
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. tJ
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all tunes to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any
location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation
that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each
part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work
found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion
or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously
accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or
consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at
Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such
other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be
uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
4
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and
shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in
conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in
the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field
cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been
charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incu L -
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the forn in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be detennined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined f
by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted
by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of
machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the ,
actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general
superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the
actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained
primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the
"actual field cost." rill
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement IJ
of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a
clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully
understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work
in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative
before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans
and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of
proposals.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
6
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
I Ireasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
3
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in
any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the
subject matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
r ,, 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor
and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-
insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by
virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to
the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of
insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
PROOF OF COVERAGE. SHAIJ. RE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF
A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED
ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF
LUBBOCK AS A PRIMARY ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF
SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE
ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO
THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED.
IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL
i
PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION
COVERAGE FOR EACII SUBCONTRACTOR.
4
A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation 1
required)
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Personal hnjury & Advertising Injury
Heavy Equipment Endorsements
XCU Endorsement
B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. NOT REQUIRED
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required)
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury'Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned
and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price
(100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance — NOT REQUIRED
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) t
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of
authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-
82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for
the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
t_
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
17 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements
of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services
on the project, for the duration of the project.
The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
t the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project; i
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter; t
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services. 1,
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who
will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth: t
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne {
by such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured
at the address shown in the proposal specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
10
f
�_j
i
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
t (9) A Contractor shall:
(a)
provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling
of any coverage agreements;
(b)
provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c)
provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d)
obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
(
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e)
retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
.,.
one year thereafter;
(f)
notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
F
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
conunission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type
and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any
additional words or changes:
,.` REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATIONCOVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to
this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This
includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing
.j labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity
of their employer or status as an employee. "
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-371-7713 or 511-804-
4000 (www tdi.state.zr.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for
coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
11
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
i
t
(
1
-s
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; r
obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the i
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project; f
retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project .
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and }
LJ
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided
to the person for whom they are providing services.
DISABLED EMPLO;TEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such ,
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms conditions and privileges of employment. '
p ,j g, P� g
12
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND
FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees,
harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in
any way, manner or form, the dernands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and
furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of
this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor
shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid,
R . discharged or waived.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
i.
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
t contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
4 Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to offering.
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or
form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless
the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in
the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances
within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal,
state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or
subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice
to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar
as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of
this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials
required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner,
as provided by the contract documents.
13
34.
TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
35.
36.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $250 ( TWO HUNDRED FIFTY)
PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the tirne stipulated for substantially completing
the work.
i
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. -
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is -3
expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT
TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor
shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such rnanner
as shall be most conductive to econorny of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's
Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will
be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which
the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion
of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly
agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its
work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or
other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God
or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same
setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty
(20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to
affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall
be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for
extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
14
37.
HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
38
09
all
41
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage
shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to
be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are
approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property.
Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harniless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work
by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive
such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses
incurred by Contractor and for well and truly perfonning the same and the whole thereof in the manner and
according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's
Representative.
PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
15
42.
43
44.
M
1-'
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, .Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall
determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial
payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall
prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the
Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by P
the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of
the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of
final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the 1 t
obligation for fiilfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty
or warranties implied by law or otherwise.
CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming i
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of 4
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
E__j
16
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's
Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed
denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed
that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor,
and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and
Owner's Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT_ BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with
the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the
Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall
be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the
Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work
any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials
and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such cquipmcnt and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the
notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed
with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the
contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract,
17
1
equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following
elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum
which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor,
then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a
newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the
completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this
contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would
have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety
shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be Iess
than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his
Surety shall be credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of
completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have
been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or
when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner,
then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be tuned over to the
Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and
the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work,
notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor
and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual
written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such
property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the
Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said
notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived
from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public
or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor
or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent
permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in
this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its
exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided
in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
m
1 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BONDS
The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in
the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Govermnent Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall
be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do
business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions
shall control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority
to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and
condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HJ-.'7ARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
19
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the
construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or
other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts 1°
and ,!or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least ( r
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal
protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other
petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
56. NONAPPROPRIATION
All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for
this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock
for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination
charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the
then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at
any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the
Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City
shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination.
57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT
At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly
authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves
the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event
such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full
amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the
right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor.
20
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
Pate Intentionally Left Blank
RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Asbestos Worker
Asbestos Supervisor
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Finisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -Heavy
Equipment Operator -Light
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice
Floor Installer
Glazier -
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer -General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
1 Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer -Helper
¢' Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder -Certified
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Hourly Rate
11.50
12.00
7.50
9.00
12.50
12.50
7.00
11.00
7.00
9.00
11.00
15.00
8.00
10.00
9.00
18.00
10.00
9.50
10.50
10.50
7.00
11.00
6.00
6.00
9.50
12.50
7.00
9.00
7.00
10.00
7.00
11.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
9.00
Asphalt Shoveler
7.50
Concrete Finisher
9.00
Concrete Finisher -Helper
7.50
Electrical Repairer -Equipment
12.50
Flagger
6.50
Form Setter
8.00
Form Setter -Helper
6.50
Laborer -General
6.00
Laborer -Utility
6.75
Mechanic
9.00
Mechanic -Helper
7.00
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
9.00
Bulldozer
9.00
Concrete Paving Machine
9.00
Front End Loader
9.00
Heavy Equipment Operator
9.00
Light Equipment Operator
8.00
Motor Grader Operator
10.25
Roller
7.00
Scraper
7.50
Tractor -Trailer
8.50
Truck Driver -Heavy
8.00
Truck Driver -Light
7.00
2
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
3
Page Intentionally Left Blank
SPECIFICATIONS
A NEW SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
for the
L.P.D. ACADEMY RIFLE & FIRING RANGE
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
2574
74th STREET SUITE 201
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806)
745-7707
MWM
ARCHITECTS, INC.
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERS
2574
74TH STREET SUITE 201
SUITE
620
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806)
745-7707
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MECHANICAL +
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
3223 S. LOOP 289
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806) 799-0753
MWM PROJECT #0707-2
DATE: FEBRUARY 18, 2008
SET NO.
A NEW SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
for the
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
L.P.D. ACADEMY RIFLE & FIRING RANGE
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
2574
74th STREET SUITE 201
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806)
745-7707
MWM
ARCHITECTS, INC.
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERS
2574
74TH STREET SUITE 201
SUITE
620
LUBBOCK,
TEXAS 79423
(806)
745-7707
HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC.
LAND SURVEYORS
CIVIL ENGINEERS
1601 AVENUE N
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
(806) 763-5642
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MECHANICAL +
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
3223 S. LOOP 289
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806) 799-0753
MWM PROJECT #0707-2
DATE: FEBRUARY 18, 2008
SET NO.
0707-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR
A MUNITIONS BUILDING FOR
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE FIRING RANGE
LUBBOCKy TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. PROJECT No. 0707-2
FEBRUARY 18, 2008
SECTION TITLE NO. PAGES
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
6
01020 ALLOWANCES
2
01030 ALTERNATES
1
01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3
01300 SUBMITTALS
3
01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
2
DIVISION 2 - CIVIL SITE WORK
SEE TABLE OF CONTENTS IN MECHANICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY OTHERS
DIVISION 2 - BUILDING SITE WORK
02110 SITE CLEARING
2
02283 TERMITE CONTROL
2
02300 EARTHWORK (BUILDING PADS ONLY)
6
02780 UNIT PAVERS
4
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CONCRETE WORK (BUILDING ONLY)
14
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
7
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
5
05210 STEEL JOISTS
3
05501 METAL FABRICATIONS
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
0707-2
DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
6
06192 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
6
06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07211 BUILDING INSULATION
3
07611 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
3
07901 JOINT SEALERS
5
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOOR, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS
4
08330 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
3
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
4
08710 FINISH HARDWARE
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
`
09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL
7
09902 PAINTING
5
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
2
10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
2
DIVISION 11
NOT USED
DIVISION 12
NOT USED
DIVISION 13
NOT USED
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SEE TABLE OF CONTENTS IN MECHANICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY OTHERS
I
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
SEE TABLE OF CONTENTS IN ELECTRICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY OTHERS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
t _.
0707-2
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The Project consists of a Site which is a portion of the City of Lubbock Police Firing Range located
on West 1g1h Street in the Lubbock County, Texas.
1. The Work shall include, but is not limited to, the construction of new sidewalks and site
development, a new 2,630 square foot +/- Simunitions Building.
2. SWPPP shall comply with Best Management Practices (BMP) Procedures.
3. All permits necessary for the completion of the Work. Permits shall include, but are not limited
to, all Federal EPA, State of Texas Commission of Environmental Quality and Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan notices and permits and TxDOT Permits (if any) plus City of Lubbock
permits.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. It is anticipated that this Work may commence by April 1, 2008. The time schedule of the Work is
such that Substantial Completion of the Work shall be accomplished as outlined in the
Owner/Contractor Agreement.
B. See Construction Schedule Bar Chart requirements in SECTION 01300 — SUBMITTALS.
1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate contracts MAY be issued by the Owner for the installation of furniture, video cabling, video
equipment installation, telephone cabling, and computer cabling. These operations MAY occur
simultaneously with the Contract Time for the Simunitions Work.
B. Coordinate the Simunitions Project Work with the Owner's Contractors.
1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Limit use of premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner
Occupancy and use. All outside storage shall be limited to the areas shown within the Limits of
Construction as shown on the Drawings.
1. Confine operations to areas within Contract Limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas
in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. If, during any
construction activities, any portion of or improvement on the Simunitions Building Site and/or
adjacent properties is damaged, the damage shall be repaired and/or replaced as required to
return the damaged item to its original condition. The Contractor shall erect and maintain in
good condition a construction fence encompassing the Contract limits. Fence shall be a
minimum of seventy-two inches (72") high and shall have a maximum opening of six (6").
Posts shall be sturdy and gates shall be provided as required. At Substantial Completion this
Contractor shall remove the fence and leave the site in the same condition as it was before
construction operations began.
2. The Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors on the site to ensure that all operations
are maintained with no interruptions.
3. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and other
Contractors at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule
deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on
site.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 -1
0707-2
1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy the site during part of the entire construction period.
Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner
usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may, at their discretion, occupy, place and install equipment
in completed areas of the building based upon the phases of the Work. Such placing of equipment
and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the Work
to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy.
2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational.
Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the
Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in
occupied portions of the building.
1.7 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Project As -Built Documents: The Contractor shall keep a record set of drawings, specifications and
all submittal data on the job at all times. Record of miscellaneous changes or job adjustments
(whether or not included in a Change Order) shall be recorded by the General Contractor for all
trades and sub -contracts. At job closeout four (4) reproducible diazo mylar sets of As -Built
documents shall be submitted for review and acceptance. Final payment will not be made until the
As -Built Documents have been accepted. Do not use the As -Built documents for construction
reference and use.
B. Also provide four (4) copies of all submissions, instructional data, maintenance information, and
warranty documents along with all other necessary information needed by the Owner, to properly
operate the building.
C. As noted in General Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish releases and waiver of liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract before final payment and/or at the
time a Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued for each Phase of the Work. Releases from
all sub -contractors and suppliers shall also be required.
D. The General Contractor, with the appropriate venders and/or Sub-Contractor(s), shall conduct -
instructional sessions with the Owner to review the operation of all equipment incorporated into the
Work.
1.8 SITE INVESTIGATION ul
A. It is required that, before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall have investigated the site and
determined to his own satisfaction the site conditions and limitations insofar as they will affect his
work.
B. Underground Utilities: Failure of the Drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealing
piping, wiring and the like shall not be construed as a guarantee on the part of the Architect or the
Owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavations or
removals shall be done at the risk of the Contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to
protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems.
1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. All standards such as those issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials, American
Standards Association, Federal, Military, or General Services Administration specifications which
are referred to in this specification shall be considered as included herein by reference and unless
a date or other designation is given which establishes the date of publication, it shall be that issue
which is current at the time of the bidding.
01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK
0707-2
..y 1.10 DEBRIS
A. All debris of any nature generated by the Work including but not limited to broken concrete, torn -out
masonry, plaster, excess fill, crates, cartons, roofing, etc. shall be unclassified and as such shall
be the entire responsibility of the Contractor who shall remove all of the aforementioned debris from
the site and legally dispose of same.
1.11 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION
A. Storage Sheds: Shall be confined to the Construction Limits shown on the Drawings.
1. Provide, maintain and remove when directed, suitable, substantial, water -tight storage facilities
in which to store all materials which would be damaged by the weather. All Storage space shall
be of sufficient size to hold all such materials, required on the site at one time and if the storage
space is an outside building, it shall have floors raised at least 6" above the ground, on heavy
joist or sleepers.
B.
Temporary Toilets: Shall be confined to the Construction Limits shown on the Drawings.
Construction personnel shall NOT use existing toilet facilities in any of the existing Lubbock Police
Firing Range Facilities.
1. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, and do any cleaning necessary to
keep the building and premises in a sanitary condition. At the beginning of the work provide
'
on the premises where approved, suitable temporary toilets and enclosures for the use of all
t `
workmen on the job, including separate contractors, and maintain same in sanitary condition
and remove same and all its contents upon completion of the building.
C.
Temporary Power and Lights: Provide temporary power and lights as required for the Project.
D.
Temporary Water: Provide temporary water as required for the Project.
1.12 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent to be in attendance at the job site
whenever any Work is being performed.
B.
The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will
assure that the Work performed will conform to the Contract requirements.
C.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality control program which will assure that
all supplies and services required shall conform to the Contract requirements whether constructed
or processed by the Contractor, or procured from Sub -contractors at any tier, or from vendors and
suppliers.
1.13 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT
A.
Bidders shall review the Williams-Stieger Occupational Safety and Health act of 1970 and all
subsequent revisions and amendments thereto and Rules and Regulations (hereinafter referred
to as OSHA) implementing the provisions of such Act prior to the submission of their proposals to
perform the work to be accomplished under this contract. Bidders shall, in preparing their bid
proposals, make adequate allowances for the strict compliance with OSHA and any subsequent
--
Rules and Regulations having the force of the law.
i . 14 ACCESS TO WORK
A.
The Owner or any one he may designate, the Architect and his representatives shall at all times
have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide
('
proper and safe facilities for such access and for inspection.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 3
0707-2
1.15 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE
A. The General Contractor shall furnish and maintain throughout all construction phases a temporary
field office including separate space for the Architect.
B. The General Contractor shall provide suitable toilet facilities for all workmen and shall remove same
at completion of work. Provide a suitable blind at all temporary toilets.
C. The General Contractor shall provide a telephone, fax machine, and computer equipped with e-
mail, all of which will be available to all persons connected with the Work; however, the Contractor
shall not be liable for long-distance calls except those authorized by himself.
1.16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe and provide for a finished and complete
piece of Work. And as such, though the Drawings and Specifications may be diagramic and may
not show, indicate, or specify all necessary off -sets, appendage(s) and/or apparatus(s), it is the
intent thereof for the General Contractor to provide all necessary items for a finished and complete
operational piece (s) of Work. All Work must meet the requirements of all the applicable and
governing codes laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of the locality.
B. No extra compensation will be allowed for oversight of any such requirements, except by written
order issued by the Owner.
C. Should any doubt arise regarding Drawings or Specifications, clarifications shall be requested of
the Architect. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete
the Work to the Owner's satisfaction.
D. The arrangement of the Specifications is intended as a convenience to the Contractor and others
connected with the Work. No responsibility, direct or implied, is assumed by the Contractor or his
Subcontractors due to a real or alleged error in the arrangement of the Specifications.
E. In case of conflict between the Drawings and Specifications or between large and small scale
Drawings or between Specifications and schedules or between one Drawing and another Drawing,
the Architect shall determine the requirements to use; but, in general, the material, equipment, or
method producing the best quality construction in the opinion of the Architect shall be used. DO
NOT PROCEED W ITH ANY WORK SUBJECT TO ANY CONFLICT UNTIL THE CONFLICT HAS
BEEN RESOLVED. IF ANY WORK PROCEEDS PRIOR TO THE RESOLUTION OF SAID
CONFLICT THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CORRECT THE WORK IN QUESTION TO THE
SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL COSTS TO THE OWNER.
F. The mention of certain items in the Specifications or Drawings to the exclusion of others; or the
mention of Work to be done in a specific area to the exclusion of similar Work required in other
areas; or the failure to cross-reference related Work specified elsewhere, shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility under the Contract Documents. If an item or piece of the Work is
shown/indicated in the Drawings and NOT in the Specifications OR if it is shown/indicated in the
Specifications and NOT in the Drawings OR if it is called out in one section of the Drawings or
Specifications and excluded in other sections of the Drawings or Specifications it shall be assumed
that the item or piece of the Work has been included, called out and/or required for the Work in
every Drawing and/or Specification and will be incorporated into the Work without any additional
cost to the Owner.
G. !he segregation of the various parts of the Work under headings or by trades, does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing every item shown on the Drawings or mentioned in
the Specifications or reasonably inferable there from as being necessary to produce the intended
result in a first class manner for a fully operational piece of Work.
01010 - 4 SUMMARY OF WORK
0707-2
1.17 CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. The Contractor and Sub -Contractors) shall exercise usual and customary professional care to
comply with all applicable laws, including the following codes and regulations in effect as of the date
of this Contract.
1. International Building Code (2003 Edition)
2. National Electrical Code (latest edition)
3. International Plumbing Code and International Mechanical Code (2000 edition)
4. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code (latest edition)
5. National Fire Protection Association Codes and Standards (latest edition)
6. ANSI/ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
7. ANSI Z136.1 Standards for Safe Use of Lasers
8. State Insurance Board requirements governing fire sprinkler systems
9. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations
10. ASHRAI Standard 90A, B, & C — Energy Conservation in New Building Design
11. U.S. Department of Health, Public Health Service Regulations and Guidelines
12. The Rules and Regulations of the Board of Underwriters Laboratories
13. Occupational Safety and Health Act
14. The "ADA" or "TAS" regulations governing access by persons with disabilities
15. International Fire Code (2003 Edition)
16. All State, National and Local Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations, not specifically
mentioned above but which apply to the proposed construction.
17. In any case of conflict between any of the documents mentioned above, the highest
requirements shall govern. No extras shall be allowed for any changes to make the Work
conform to the regulations of the above mentioned documents; they shall be considered as
completely included in the Contract Price. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications shall
be constructed to permit Work not conforming to these codes.
B. All applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities
having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they
will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full.
1.18 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the Work is to be done. The Contractor shall
visit the site and determine the location of all utility lines. Existing lines shown in the Drawings are
not guaranteed as to size and location or for completeness. Any utility line which interferes with the
new construction and is not to be relocated, removed or rerouted by others and/or is to remain on
the site as shown in the Drawings, shall be relocated or rerouted by the Contractor as directed by
the Architect/Engineer and Owner at no extra cost to the Owner.
1.19 LAYOUT OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the layout of the Work in strict compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1.20 COLOR (S) FOR PRODUCTS
A. Color samples shall be furnished for all materials along with the other submittal material. All
- samples shall be furnished to the Architect in sufficient time as to cause no delay in the progress
of the Work, bearing in mind that ALL colors must be in hand before ANY selections can be made.
Any Product color, whether specified, selected or not, shall be approved in writing before said
Product can be ordered and/or fabricated.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 5
0707-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) y
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01010
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
01010 - 6 SUMMARY OF WORK
1
I
i
0707-2
SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 A RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing handling and
processing allowances.
1. Types of allowances required include the following:
a. Lump sum allowances.
B. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are included in Section "Change Order
Procedures."
C. Should the cost of any work covered by allowances be more or less than the state amount for the
allowance, the Contract sum shall be adjusted accordingly by proper Change Order.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Architect of the date when the final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
in order to avoid delay in performance of the Work.
1. When requested by the Architect, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections; include recommendations that are relevant to performance of the Work.
2. Purchase products and systems as selected by the Architect from the designated supplier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations
to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related construction
activities.
3.2 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 1: Provide an allowance of $5,000.00 for all soils compaction and concrete
testing work.
1. The allowance figures cover the required travel, field sampling, design mixes, testing services
(for tests that pass) reproduction of copies, postage and all other testing laboratories expenses.
2. The Contractor shall include the following in his Base Proposal and will not be a part of the
Testing Allowances:
a. Contractor's incidental labor and facilities required to assist the Testing Laboratory;
b. Costs of re -testing that fail;
c. Contractor's overhead and profit.
3. Contractor shall list the amount of testing invoices on --ach "Application for Paym?nt" and
include copies of invoices with each Application.
END OF SECTION 01020
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
ALLOWANCES 01020-1
0707-2
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.
B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain
construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from
Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of
construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation
methods described in Contract Documents.
C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure
that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Bidders are required
to include in their proposal all related work, materials, and methods necessary to achieve the Work
described under each Alternate.
1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the
Alternate.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ALTERNATE NO. 1:
1. Provide an Alternate Price to add two (2) flagpole bases and the installation of two (2) donated
flagpoles plus associated sidewalk paving around the flagpoles.
B. ALTERNATE NO. 2:
1. Provide an Alternate Price to add an eight (8) inch deep compacted caliche parking lot plus
associated excavation/removal of six (6) inches of the parking lot area.
C. ALTERNATE NO. 3:
1. Provide and Alternate Price to delete one (1) interior stair and associated wall construction and
the infill of the second floor with floor construction equal to the adjacent second floor
construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01030
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
ALTERNATES
01030-1
l
0707-2
y SECTION 01045 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
y and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
individual parts of the Work.
1. Requirements of this Section apply to all portions of the work including mechanical and
electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 Sections for other requirements
and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
C. In general all cutting and patching shall be performed in such a manner as to provide a finish
appearance similar to the original wall, floor and ceiling conditions that existed in the space being
altered. Finishes shall be as near the existing adjacent finishes as possible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required
before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and
patching will be performed and request approval to proceed.
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed; indicate why
it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.
5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated and those
that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's
right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of the Work found to be
unsatisfactory.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would
reduce their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following
structural elements:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel
e. Lintels
f. Structural decking
g. Miscellaneous structural metals
h. Equipment supports
i. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 -1
I .
0707-2
B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related
components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or
result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following
operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting
b. Primary operational systems and equipment
c. Air or smoke barriers
d. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
e. Membranes and flashings
f. Fire protection systems
g. Noise and vibration control elements and systems
h. Control systems
i. Communication systems
j. Conveying systems
k. Electrical wiring systems
I. Special construction specified by Division —13 Sections
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied
spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities,
or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched
in a visually unsatisfactory manner. In general, all cutting and patching shall be performed in such
a manner as to insure that the finished surfaces shall be as close visually to the existing surfaces
as possible.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or
cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent
surfaces or like construction elsewhere to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.
Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under
which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe
or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including
mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict.
Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the
building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
01045 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
0707-2
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled craftsmen to perform cutting and patching. Patching shall be done by
craftsmen certified in the particular craft involved. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest
a feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to
their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained
or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer;
comply with the original -installer's recommendations.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to
their original condition.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining
construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair
floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and
appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and
second coat.
4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of
uniform appearance.
i<-=s 3.4 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access.
Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping,
conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe
covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 3
0707-2
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work, including:
1. Contractor's construction schedule
2. Submittal schedule
3. Shop Drawings
4. Product Data
5. Samples
B. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services."
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related
construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery other submittals and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of
the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals.
B. Submittal Transmittal: Packageeach submittal appropriatelyfor transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from
sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.
1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate
sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and
limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document
requirements.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar — chart type Contractor's
construction schedule. Submit within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of the
Work".
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous
vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units
of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values".
2. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Ar chiiect'S procedures necessary
y
for certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by
requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy
by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1
0707-2
C. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in
the Project meeting room and temporary field office.
a 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work
and are no longer involved in construction activities.
. ; D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without
specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates and similar drawings.
C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration
of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation
to fit in the space provided or function as intended.
1. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show
sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.
1.6 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product
Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts,
standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and
performance curves. Where Product Data must be specifically prepared because standard printed
data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes
information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the
applicable information.
2. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for
maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with
action taken and corrections or modifications required.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may
serve as the final submittal.
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical
with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing
color, texture and pattern.
1. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the
final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the
material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show
approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connection, operation and
similar construction characteristics.
r "' 01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS
0707-2
2. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout
,
the course of construction.
1.8 COLORS
A. Do NOT place material orders until the material's color is approved by the Architect and Owner in
writing.
B. Even if a material's color is specified or called out in the Contract Documents, do NOT place an
order for said material until written conformation from the Architect is received confirming the
material's color.
1.9 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is
required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken and
return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action
stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
�f
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
0707-2
SECTION 01400- QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports,
performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include
Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. Required tests of soils, earthwork and
concrete work shall be conducted by the Owner through its appointed Testing Agency; all other
testing, including that of governmental authorities, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and
the Contractor shall include sums for such other testing in his Proposal.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not
production of standard products.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the
Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests,
cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation
procedures.
2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality
control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality
control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities,
except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by
another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent
agency and not by the Contractor. The Owner will engage the independent agency.
1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections,
tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's
responsibility.
a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's
responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction.
2. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required
inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:
a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to
facilitate inspections and tests.
b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or
assisting the agency in taking samples.
c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to
testing laboratories.
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400 -1
0707-2
d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes
that require control by the testing agency.
e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
3. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and
similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services
with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities
to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and
tests.
4. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and
similar activities.
5. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Testing Agency at least 48 hours before an on -site
test is required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample -taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including
deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements
for "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities and protect repaired
construction.
C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
0707-2
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
a. Protection of existing trees and vegetation
b. Protection of, if any, existing irrigation system(s) to remain
c. Topsoil stripping
d. Clearing and grubbing
e. Protection of existing site improvement to remain.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks
and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other
occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing
improvements indicated to remain in place.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to the property
owner(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING
A. General: Prior to removal, review with the Architect any and all trees to be removed. Remove trees,
shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as required to permit installation
of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated.
"Removal" includes digging out and off -site disposing of stumps and roots.
1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner,
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 6
inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonablyfree of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over
2 inches in diameter and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other objectionable material.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.
b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines
to prevent damage to root system.
2. Stockpile where directed by the Owner and Architect suitable topsoil in storage piles for use in
fine grading. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage
piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material only
if the Owner does not want said topsoil.
4. If the Owner wants unsuitable or excess topsoil, then transport said topsoil to storage site(s)
as directed by the Owner.
SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1
0707-2
5. Should it be required to harvest topsoil from a different location than the O'Reilly DC Site, then
said site shall be re -seeded with grass species acceptable to the Owner. Re -seeded areas
shall be watered and maintained for one growing season.
C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated
to be left standing or those selected to be relocated to an alternate site by the Contractor as
directed by the Owner. Also remove all debris not suitable for fine grading to a depth of 8 inches.
1. Completely remove stumps, roots and other debris protruding through ground surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth and thoroughly
compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as
indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on
mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16
sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction
is included under this Section.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and if directed by the Owner, unsuitable
or excess topsoil from Owner's property and legally dispose of same.
END OF SECTION 02110
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
02110 - 2 SITE CLEARING
0707-2
SECTION 02283 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL DOCUMENTS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application.
B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing
authorities for application of soil treatment solution.
C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are
completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.
B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during
inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant
manufacturer.
1.6 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY
A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of
subterranean termites and that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period,
Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator and
Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent
infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of
one of following chemical elements and concentrations:
1. Cypermethrin ("Product TC" ).
B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to Architect and
approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions
which are not injurious to planting.
TERMITE CONTROL 02283 - 1
r
i
i
0707-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION !
• t:
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on
areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas
under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under
slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
1. Under foundation footings, grade beams and slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before
concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:
a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab,
including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior
partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around
interior column footers.
b. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and -
attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-112 gallons of chemical
solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.
c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from
grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside
of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than
12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being
replaced in trench.
2. Treat soil under or around crawl -space structures as follows:
a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench along inside of foundation walls,
along both sides of interior partitions, and around piers and plumbing. Do not apply an
overall treatment in crawl spaces.
b. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from
grade to footing, along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath entrance _
platform porches, etc.
c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. along the inside and outside of foundation
walls of porches.
d. Apply one gallon per 10 sq. ft. of soil surface as an overall treatment, only where attached
concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
3. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gal. per 10 lin. ft.,
poured directly into the hollow spaces.
C. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gals.
per 10 in. ft. of penetration.
D. Notify the Owner 72 hours prior to application of soil termiticide treatment.
E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied.
Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.
F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading,
or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02283
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
02283 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL
0707-2
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK (BUILDING PADS ONLY)
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The extent of earthwork is shown on Drawings.
B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs and walks located immediately adjacent to the building
(plus 5 feet) is included as part of this work. See Civil Engineering Documents for earthwork
requirements under the site work.
C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
governing authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service
1. Soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations will
be provided as called for under Section 01020, Allowances. The testing laboratory shall
comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies
to Contractor, Owner and Engineer.
1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered.
a. Atterberg Limits
b. Linear Shrinkage
C. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve
2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or
change of soil if any other is used.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information
1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made by Hamilton Engineering, Inc.
(Project No. - report not complete at the time of issuance). Logs of borings and test
data will be available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water
conditions that may be encountered at the site.
2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of
accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are
made available for the convenience of the Contractor.
3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost
to Owner.
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in
place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.
1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during
EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only) 02300 -1
excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility
companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities
to satisfaction of utility owner.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others,
except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility r
services have been provided.
C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted
D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and
post with warning lights.
1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification
groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP.
1. Select Non -Expansive Fill Material:
a. Maximum Aggregate Size ...................................... 3.0 inches
b. Percent Retained on No. 4 Sieve ..................................... 25-50
C. Percent Retained on No. 40 Sieve .................................... 50-85
d. Plasticity Index ............................................. 15 maximum
B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification
groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT.
C. Subbase Material: See Civil Engineering Documents for subbase material under paving and walks
away from the building.
D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required
finish grade elevations.
B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on
ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed,
material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions and other materials
encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation.
C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense.
D. Under footings, oundation bases, or retaining wails, fill unauthorized excavation by extending
indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable
to Architect.
E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations
02300 - 2 EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only)
0707-2
of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect.
F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect
who will make an inspection of conditions.
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry
excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect.
2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of
contract conditions relative to changes in work.
G. Stability of Excavations
1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction.
Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of
material excavated.
2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
H. Shoring and Bracing
1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and
cross -braces, in good serviceable condition.
2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be
open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away
from excavations.
2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation
limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
J. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for
backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.
K. Excavation for Structures
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot,
and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
L. Excavation for Pavements: Refer to Civil Engineering Documents.
M. Excavation for Trenches (within the building lines)
1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide
to provide ample working room.
2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to
establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms
of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a
6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for
EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only) 02300 - 3
0707-2
entire body of pipe.
5. Backfill trenches with lean concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or
wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings or which pass under wall
footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings.
6. Concrete is specified in Division 3.
7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized
by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
N. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.)
3.2 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density
specified for each area classification.
B. Percentage of Minimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following t_ a
percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density
relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) at not less than 2
percentage points of the optimum moisture content.
1. Structures: Compact top 12" minimum of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material
at 95% maximum dry density.
2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" minimum of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density.
3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material
at 90% maximum dry density.
4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95%
maximum dry density.
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free
water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations..
1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction
to specified density.
2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be
stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until
moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area
classification listed below.
1. Tree stump excavations: Use select, non -expansive fill material.
2. In excavations, use select, non -expansive fill material.
3. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
4. Under walks, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both.
5. Under steps, use subbase material.
6. Under building slabs, use satisfactory select, non -expansive material.
B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits but not until completion of the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing and perimeter insulation.
2 Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities.
3. Removal of concrete formwork.
4. Removal of trash and debris.
C. Ground Surface Preparation
1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious
02300 - 4 EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only)
�t
§ 0707-2
materials from ground surface (to a minimum depth of 6 inches) prior to placement of fills.
--j- This material should not be used for structural fill or in the building areas. Plow, strip, or
break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface.
2. Tree stumps, if encountered, should be completely removed and backfilled as specified.
3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for
particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to
optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
D. Placement and Compaction
1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted
by hand -operated tampers.
2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture
content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry
density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are
muddy, frozen or contain frost or ice.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures to required elevations. Take care
to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around
structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.
3.4 GRADING
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels
or slopes between points where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades.
B.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from
structures and to prevent ponding.
C.
Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows:
s
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot
above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish
surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.
3. Pavements: See other Division 2 Specifications.
D.
Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted
as specified and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of/z' when tested
with a 10 foot straightedge.
E.
Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum
density for each area classification.
3.5 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE
A. See Civil Engineering documents for paving specifications.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction
1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further
construction work is performed.
2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM
D2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D2922, (Nuclear Gage Method) as applicable.
B. Building Slab Subgrade (Note that Owner Contract with the Testing Agency may show different
testing requirements than outlined in this specification.)
EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only) 02300 - 5
s
0707-2
1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2500 sq. ft. of building slab / walk,
but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for
every 2500 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab / walk area, but in no case less than 3 tests.
Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested
and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer.
2. Testing of backfilled trenches shall be at least one density and moisture content test per 100
linear feet per 6-inch compacted lift.
3. See Civil Engineering documents for testing of subgrade under paving and other
miscellaneous site work.
C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which
have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense to the Owner.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape and compact to
required density prior to further construction.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property
1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris and
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
This Section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
..
AEL .P.��ROBINETT
..............................
:9g _ 71085
OVAL
2.ld:oY
02300 - 6 EARTHWORK (Building Pads Only)
0707-2
[ Z
SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit pavers set in aggregate setting bed.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under unit
pavers.
2. Division 2 Section "Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving" for cast -in -place concrete curbs and
gutters serving as edge restraint for unit pavers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers with
elastomeric sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Concrete Pavers
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of unit paver
indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color,
texture and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners and other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar
in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material and setting material from one
source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
C. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers
required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special
features for expansion joints, contiguous work and cast -in -place concrete edge restrains and accent
paving as indicated:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 1
0707-2
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination
from earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from
steel strapping.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Concrete Pavers:
a. Ready Stone Co.
b. Pavestone Co.
c. Approved Equal
2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: Colors and textures shall be selected from the manufacturer's full range of
color and texture selections in compliance with the City of Lubbock's Plate No. 4-99.
B. Pavers shall have a "truncated dome" on top of the exposed paver surface compliance with ADA
and TAS regulations.
2.3 UNIT PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Concrete paver units shall meet all requirements of ASTM C936, C33.
1. Size shall be 3 7/8" x 7 13/16" x 2 3/8". Layout pattern shall be in a two unit by two unit
basketweave pattern that complies with the City of Lubbock Plate No. 4-99 Typical Handicap
Curb Ramp.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Job -Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Complywith requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mixed concrete with minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 4000 psi.
1. Edge Restraints shall match the requirements of the City of Lubbock Plate No. 4-99 Typical
Handicap Curb Ramp.
2.5 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED MATERIALS
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements of ASTM C33 for fine aggregate.
02780 - 2 UNIT PAVERS
0707-2
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation
requirements as ASTM C33 for fine aggregate.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
r 3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Vacuum clean concrete slabs -on -grade and accent restrains to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose
particles.
B.
Remove substances, from accent restrains, that could impair finish, including curing and accent
restrains to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose particles.
C.
Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are
ready to receive subbase for unit pavers.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations and other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B.
Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
C.
Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without
cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
D.
Joint Pattern: As indicated.
1. Install job -built concrete slabs -on -grade edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division
3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete."
2. Comply with City of Lubbock Plate No. 4-99 Typical Handicap Curb Ramp.
3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED FOR UNIT PAVER APPLICATIONS
A.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) maximum, taking care that
moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and
compacted.
B.
Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
r C.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm),
being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight
against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed
3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit paVers with spacer
bars on sides of each unit.
D.
Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight
surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
"' UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 3
i
0707-2
r—
E. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
F. Repeat joint -filling process 30 days later.
3.5 REPAIR, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged
or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and
install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of
replacement.
B. Cleaning: Remove excess materials from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean as }
recommended by the paver manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 02780
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
02780 - 4 UNIT PAVERS
0707-2
SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK (BUILDING ONLY)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving - See Civil Engineering Documents
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction".
3. ACI 304 'Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete".
4. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting".
5. ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting".
6. ACI 311 'Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
7. ACI 318 'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
8. ACI 347 'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
9. ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete".
10. ACI 212 "Admixtures for Concrete".
11. ACI 117 "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials".
12. MSP-1-01 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".
B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not
conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the Architect.
C. Design and Testing:
1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed
mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this Project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder
breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established mix from an
acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent, different
compression test reports for the proposed mix.
2. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be covered as called for in Section
01020, Allowances.
3. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the
testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site
and take the concrete cylinders and be responsible for their care and handling including
breaking of same at laboratory.
4. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Owner.
5. Test results shall be furnished to the Owner, Architect, Engineer and the Contractor.
6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate
concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be
replaced with new, as directed by Architect.
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 1
0707-2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems and others as requested by the Architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement
of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete
structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS:
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork
for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the
Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed
concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or
"good -as -new".
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class 1,
Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge -sealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of
an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. I
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished
structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at
least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
D. Corrugated Steel Forms: Shall be 1.00 or 1.00SV "Conform" as manufactured by Vulcraft, a
division of Nucor, Grapeland, Texas, or approved equal. Decking shall be formed from 26 gage
galvanized sheets.
E. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square
spot footings are shown on the Drawings.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric in flat sheets.
C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 80 or
ASTM A499.
D. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for
spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire
bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other
devices will not be acceptable.
2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base
materials will not support chair legs.
3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel
protected.
03300 - 2 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C150, Type I or II, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. ASTM C33. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious
substances.
2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33. Clean, un-coated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud,
loam or foreign matter as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted.
3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size:
a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third
of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual
reinforcing bars or bundles or bars.
b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and
methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or
voids.
D. Fly Ash: The contractor may, at his option, use ASTM C618, Type C or Type F fly ash, replacing a
maximum of 20% of the cementitious materials content.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
I I F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
G. Evaporation Retardant: Shall be a thin, continuous film which prevents rapid moisture loss from the
concrete surface. Use when concrete operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, high
- temperatures, or for relative humidity. Evaporation retardant shall be equal to Eucobar by the Euclid
Chemical Company or Confilm by Master Builders.
H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A or D, containing not more than 0.1% chloride
ions.
Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding.
2. Type C, Accelerating.
3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding.
4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating.
Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by
Architect.
K. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, containing
not more than 0.1 % chloride ions.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: ASTM D944, pre -molded cane fiber saturated with asphalt.
Unless indicated otherwise, %Z' thickness by depth of slab.
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 3
0707-2
B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections.
C. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder shall be equal to Stego Wrap Vapor Retarder (15 mil)
by Stego Industries, SealTight Perminator (15 mil) by W. R. Meadows, VaporBlock 15 by Raven
Industries, or Griffolyn Vaporguard by Reef Industries.
D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,
complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene -coated burlap.
F. Liquid Curing Compound: Use on all interior slabs to receive subsequent floor coverings. Shall be
dissipating resin type, which chemically breaks down after approximately eight (8) weeks.
Membrane forming compound shall meet ASTM C309, Types 1 and ID, Class B, water based. Meet
federal/state VOC/AIM regulations. (Sodium silicates prohibited.)
G. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use on all permanently exposed interior and exterior floor/paving
surfaces. Conform to ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A or B. The sealer shall not after -yellow or
change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, stain -resistant and
dust -proof sealer.
H. Concrete Sealer/Hardener (on all scheduled surfaces): Equal to SealTite Liqui-Hard as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or Intraseal by Conspec. The sealer/hardener shall harden
and dust -proof in one easy operation.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable
provisions of ASTM C94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used
for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials
to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1, ACI
301, and ACI 318.
1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete
proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C192 and conduct strength
tests in accordance with ASTM C39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing
relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with
at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required.
Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the
Architect, to establish each point on the curve.
2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete
proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing
standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified
records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for
2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions.
3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions
to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive
strength of concrete.
4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214
methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency
of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1
in 100.
03300 - 4 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the
n Architect.
D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the
Drawings and schedules:
1. Foundation Concrete: 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum, non -
air -entrained.
2. Interior Floor Slabs -on -grade: 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, about 0.48
maximum, non -air -entrained.
3. Interior elevated floor slabs on corrugated form decking: 3000 psi 28-day compressive
strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum, non -air -entrained.
4. See Civil Engineering documents for additional requirements for concrete mix design for site
work concrete.
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant;
at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised
mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using
in the work.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete
as required for placement and workability.
B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below
50 degrees F.
C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. See Civil
engineering Documents.
D. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
directions.
E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing
at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
2.7 SLUMP LIMITS
A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3".
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of
HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete.
4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4".
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C94, and as herein specified.
B. Control of Mixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for
placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the
maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions,
or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed into the concrete.
C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 5
0707-2
time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C94 may be required.
D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and
delivery time from 1 % hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might
be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete
surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Forms shall not leak cement paste.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms
only. Kerf wood inserts forforming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and
for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for
inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on
forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designated
to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at
least 1%' inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes
larger than V diameter in concrete surface.
I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing
such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Re -tighten forms
after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
K. Placing Corrugated Form:
1. Corrugated Form sheets shall be placed end to end, beginning at the corner of the building
with the corrugated ribs perpendicular to the framing members. Sheets shall be placed one
row at a time, maintaining proper alignment and coverage. Place sheets with edges up and
with the ends lapped a minimum of 3". End laps shall be centered over the supporting
members, and the sides shall be lapped one half corrugation.
2. Sheets shall be attached to the supporting members by welding through the bottom of the
corrugation as soon as they are placed and aligned. Welds shall be made through 16 gage
un-coated welding washers furnished with the corrugated form deck.
3. End laps shall be welded at each side lap and at the center of the sheet. Welds at the
03300 - 6 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
intermediate supports shall be made at the center of the sheet only, and at the side laps only,
in an alternating pattern.
4. Admixtures containing chloride or chloride salts shall not be used in connection with the
galvanized deck.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Do not proceed until plumbing and electrical rough -ins are complete and compaction of subgrade
and fill is completed.
B. Install in accordance with ASTM E1643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
C. Provide vapor retarder as specified under all slabs on grade. Start membrane under perimeter
grade beam and over subgrade. All joints and seams, both lateral and butt, shall be overlapped 6
inches and taped using vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape system. All penetrations,
such as utilities and columns, must be sealed using specified vapor retarder and tape.
D. Protect completed membrane from damage. Any damaged area after installation of vapor retarder
3 shall be repaired using manufacturer's product and tape. Cover any damage by a minimum overlap
of 6 inches in all directions and tape carefully around entire perimeter of repair.
3.3 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's
recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale; earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,
construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,
space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed
concrete surfaces.
E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not
use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction
loads.
F. Install welded wire fabric in as long of lengths as practicable (flat sheets only - rolls will not be
accepted). Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps
in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints:
1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair
the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect.
2. Provide key -ways at least 1 %2' deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls
and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement
across construction joints.
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 7
0707-2
B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: -
1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed.
Use screed type joints equal to those manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc.
Screed Key joints are of 24 gage galvanized steel with 1 %" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers.
Install with a minimum of five special 16 gage by 1" stakes per ten feet of length of material.
If saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive
or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as
soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade.
This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete finishing operations for wet -saw cutting and
1 to 4 hours for "Soff-Cut" joints.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of
contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls
and elsewhere as indicated.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed
strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide
and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete
surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted
compacting type screeds.
3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds thatwill not bond with, stain noradversely
affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring
bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and underconditions
of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material
to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh
concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed
on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of
weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction
joints as herein specified.
3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re-
handling or flowing.
B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation
of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood
forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by
03300 - 8 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element
submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each
insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and
complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of the mix.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete
during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on
the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations.
E. Cold Weather Placing:
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by
frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat
all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature
of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
F. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below
90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the
concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount
of mixing.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in
concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete.
4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work
or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched
as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding %:' in height rubbed down with wood blocks.
B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete,
such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete
surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as
specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed.
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have
received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal.
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 9
0707-2
i_,
1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform
color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the
rubbing process.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces,- unless otherwise shown.
3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or
elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating.
Immediately after screeding, apply a coat of evaporative reducer with a constant pressure
sprayer. Spray surface lightly and uniformly, covering the slab surface with a fine mist. Apply
to slabs according to manufacturer's directions. Begin floating when surface water has
disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven
floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding
'/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
B. Trowel Finish:
1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise
shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin-film
finish coating system.
2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform
in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding %" in 10 feet
when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
C. Non -Slip Broom Finish:
1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere
as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
2. Immediately aftertrowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular
to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature,
_
and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary
for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface
after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72
hours.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has
dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive)
during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid
drying at end of final curing period.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
j
windy conditions cause excessive moisture loss.
03300 -10 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
moist curing or moisture retaining cover curing
C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by g y 9 9
or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog
spray.
b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover
with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage
of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in
widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof
tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows:
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing
operations are complete (within 2 hours).
b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with
manufacturer's directions. Re -coat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after
initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing
period.
C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with
coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing,
dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish
materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
D. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams,
supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period
or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as
(_. applicable.
E. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other
flat surfaces by moist curing.
1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as
applicable.
2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of
moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
F. Applying Concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Concrete shall have cured for a least 7 days.
2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stains, grease, etc. removed.
3. Apply by spray, brush, or Iamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet
per gallon.
4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
G. Applying Concrete Sealer/Hardener (on scheduled surfaces): Apply on all concrete slab floors
scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Concrete shall have cured for at a least 14 days.
2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stain, grease, etc. removed.
3. Apply by spray or brush applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon.
4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar
parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24
hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form
ICONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 -11
0707-2
removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. i-
3.12 RE -USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound
material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove
fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not
use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect.
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure
concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous
concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and
steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly
rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as
shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct
elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines
and equipment.
D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide masonry grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where
indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Masonry grout shall comply with ASTM C476.
Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement.
3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but
only when acceptable to Architect.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over YV in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods
and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary
patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be
patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so
that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface;
and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding
agent.
2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect
the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
03300 -12 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane
to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to
smoothness, using a template having required slope.
2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of
concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width,
spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when
acceptable to Architects.
5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with
clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen
concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout
coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide
concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend
with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method.
Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or
concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2'/ parts fine
aggregate passing a No.16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and
placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep
patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Testing will be provided as called for under Section 01020, Allowances.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following,
as directed by the Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94.
2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of
discharge.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of
compressive strength test specimens.
4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and
when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory
cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof,
of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed;
1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be
the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days.
a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of
concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch
if fewer than 5 are used.
b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength
CONCRETE WORK (Building Only) 03300 - 13
0707-2
test maybe waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
c. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day
that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests
and 28-day tests.
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained
in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be
required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
This Section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
a,K; 7 'S
:w
DEL P. ROBINETT
•_ _71085_ .ia
2. / F- o Y
03300 - 14 CONCRETE WORK (Building Only)
0707-2
ASECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top
of walls with strong, waterproof, non -staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2 feet down
both sides of walls and anchor securely in place.
B. Protect masonry against freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40 degrees F. and
falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work.
Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the "Construction and Protection
Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the Technical Notes on Brick and
Tile Construction by the Structural Clay Products Institute.
C. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
- frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the SCPI recommendations. Do
not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing.
D. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents.
E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout.
1.4 WORKMANSHIP
A. It is the express intent of the contract documents to require a first-class masonry job throughout the
entire project. Appearance shall be consideration as well as soundness in judging overall quality
and workmanship.
B. The Contractor shall engage, and keep on project at all times during masonry operations, an
experienced and qualified masonry Foreman or Superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect.
C. It shall be the duty of the aforementioned individual to layout all masonry work, expedite, and keep
all masonry operations under continuous surveillance to ensure the required class of workmanship
herein specified.
D. Should defects become apparent, same shall be immediately noted, corrected and if necessary, halt
masonry operations until corrective measures can be agreed upon.
1. Defects are defined as, but not necessarily limited to, unequal joints (horizontal and vertical);
surfaces in and out of plane; striation of highlights and shadows with parallel lighting;
excessive chips; use of distorted units; bunching of blends; jumping bond; displacement of
units after initial setting; surfaces out of plumb; staining; use of off color or off texture units; use
of units with manufacturers defects; change of mortar color; toothing; excessive racking; lean
or unsound mortar; improper bonding and anchoring; and improper pointing and cleaning.
2. If one or more of the aforementioned defects become apparent and corrective measures
cannot remedy said defect, the Contractor shall replace any area or areas of defective
masonry without any additional cost to the Owner. Any replaced areas shall be made in even
1. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 1
0707-2
units of surface such as vertical joint to a corner, whole wall or otherwise to prevent a
"patched" appearance in any one surface area.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with
specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars.
Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars and other arrangements and assemblies
as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each
kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements
indicated.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" wide x 8" high
(151Ms" x 7%" x 7%" actual), unless otherwise indicated.
B. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers,
bonding and other special conditions.
C. Hollow Load -Bearing CMU: ASTM C90 where shown as "CMU" and as follows:
1. Weight Classification: Medium weight units unless otherwise indicated. (Less than 115 lbs.
per cu. ft., oven dry weight of concrete).
D. Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and
temperature to comply with ASTM C90, Type 1.
E. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage
specified for Type 1 units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather
Bureau Station nearest the project site.
F. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, except Type III maybe used for cold weather construction.
Provide natural color.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar: ASTM C144, except forjoints less than Y4" use aggregate graded
with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: ASTM C404.
E. Water: Clean and potable.
04230 - 2 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
0707-2
2.4 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A615 and as
follows:
1. Provide Grade 60.
2. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked.
B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry:
1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with
matching corner ("L') units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82,
with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of
approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls as required to position side rods for full
embedment in mortar coverage of not less than %' elsewhere. Joint reinforcing to meet the
following requirements:
a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c.
b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry and one side rod for each
face shell of each concrete masonry wythe.
c. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Joint reinforcing to be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A153,
Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft).
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Specified under a Division 7 Section, "Flashing and Sheet Metal".
2.6 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not lower the freezing point of mortar or masonry grout by use of admixtures or
anti -freezing agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar
required, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use Type S, ready -mixed masonry cement for all masonry.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to masonry cement.
C. Masonry Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 for masonry grout for use in construction
of reinforced and non -reinforced unit masonry. Use masonry grout of consistency indicated or if not
otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all
spaces intended to receive masonry grout.
1. Fine Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 1.
2. Coarse Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89.
3. Air -Entraining Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout.
4. Water -Reducing Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout.
5. Grout slump shall be between 8 and 11 inches.
6. Mortar or concrete shall not be substituted for masonry grout.
7. Grout samples shall be taken and tested as per ASTM C1019 for each 5000 sq. ft. of masonry.
8. A grout sample shall be taken and tested whenever there is any change in mix proportions,
methods of mixing, or materials used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to
the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified.
L_. B. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, un-chipped
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 3
f}4
0707-2
edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
C. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
D. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units)
solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness
of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar and when the
adjacent cell is to be filled with grout. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown,
provide 3/e" joints.
E. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints.
F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth.
Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove
loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
G. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar.
Fill CMU cores with masonry grout under bearing plates, beams, posts, lintels and similar conditions
unless otherwise indicated.
J. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of
reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork.
K. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to
prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
L. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to
carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during
construction.
M. Allow not less than 10 days to elapse after completion of masonry beams and lintels before
removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing
period.
3.2 WALLS AND GROUTING
A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond
with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock
each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as
required for comers, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions.
Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work, where
indicated.
B. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and
to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of
less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
C. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
D. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide
04230 - 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
0707-2
minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for
vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent
to reinforced cores or cells.
E. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to
allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal
lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of
non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms.
F. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions.
G. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions.
H. Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow:
1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be
grouted.
2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour
height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding
192 bar diameters nor 10 feet.
3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below
4 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam.
4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place
grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout
pours 1 Y2" below top course of pour.
5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 %Z' below bond beam course. Place horizontal
reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond
beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.
1. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt,
mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean
reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting
masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace
closures to resist grout pressures.
Grout Placing:
1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength
to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of'mortar bond. Install shores and
bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.
2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the
Architect.
3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than
one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4 feet.
Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or
vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.
4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to
within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry.
5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend
reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1'/z" of top course
of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for
second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required.
3.3 JOINTING
A. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minorvariations required to maintain bond alignment.
If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with %" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry wall which are to be
concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer
larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants
where shown.
I" REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 5
0707-2
B. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners
at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove
units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
3.4 PLACING REINFORCING
A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce
bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the
Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or
other causes.
B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against
displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where
vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than
the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater).
C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the
Architect. Provide lapped splices with the minimum lap shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching
to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.
D. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/a' on
exterior face of walls and '/2" at other locations.
E. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal
side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of %" on exterior side of walls and
%" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 8". Provide continuity at corners by use of
prefabricated "L" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity. Space
continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated.
3.5 LINTELS
A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. Provide minimum bearing of 6 at
each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Provide vertical control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry
accessory items as the masonry work progresses.
B. See Division 7 sections for "Joint Sealers".
C. Build -in joint filler where shown, specified in a Division 7 section "Joint Sealers". Joint width for
sealants: %" unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining
units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely
fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds.
04230 - 6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
0707-2
�µ C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing
to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK Bulletin No.
28.
s END OF SECTION 04230
This section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
!ll+hl��i+7ll�t�1
71085
27.11,10P
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 7
0707-2 -,
i
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details
to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required.
B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise
shown on the Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03300
B. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated:
1. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued.
2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by the
Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation.
4. AWS D1.1 - "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
5. ASTM A6 - "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling
and Bars for Structural Use".
B. Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure".
2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS
qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
3. If re -certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility.
C. Source Quality Control:
1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and
field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply.
D. Design of Members and Connections:
1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise
indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work.
2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of
the structure are not clearly indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1
0707-2
1. Submit Shop Drawings prepared under the supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer
including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and
details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection.
2. Architects review of Shop Drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with
requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's
responsibility.
3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds
by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld.
4. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other
anchorages to be installed by others.
5. The fact that no exceptions have been taken or that comments and/or markings may have
been made on or attached to Shop Drawings or submittals shall not constitute, either expressly
or impliedly, a change to the Contract Documents.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete
and reinforced masonry in ample time to not delay that work.
C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the
ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials
from erosion and deterioration.
D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the
members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992, Fy = 50 ksi.
B. Miscellaneous Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.
C. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A501.
E. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A123 or ASTM A386.
F. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
G. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon
steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications.
H. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts.
1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for
exposed connections.
I. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and
hardened washers, as follows:
1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM
A325.
J. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification A -A 1923A, Type
05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
I'
0707-2
d'
4.
K. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.
L. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free,
"Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red), AFP2018 Fleet Line Red Oxide
Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, Carbocoat 115 SG by Carboline.
M. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and
water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD-C 621.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible.
Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on
the final Shop Drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown.
2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence
which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free
of markings, burrs, and other defects.
4. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized
after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
B. Connections:
1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.
3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where
unfinished bolts are shown.
C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing
members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only
nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.
D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Install flat hardened
washers over slotted holes occurring in the outer ply of connections.
E. Welded Construction:
1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used
in correcting welding work.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes
without warp.
F. Holes for Other Work:
1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage
of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final Shop Drawings. Provide
threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work.
2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge
holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
G. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made
only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests
shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
i
0707-2
i
C
2.3 SHOP PAINTING
A. General:
1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be
embedded in concrete. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed
portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only.
2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type
connections.
3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing.
4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change
color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove
loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Solvent clean steel to remove all
soluble contaminates followed by power tool cleaning to remove all insoluble contaminates in
accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", or
2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or
3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or
4. SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed
surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed,
and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Erector.
3.2 ERECTION
A. General: Comply with the RISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein
specified.
B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections
of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when
permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to
achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds.
C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively
complete the work.
D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to
foundations and other in -place work.
1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to
accurate locations.
2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete
installation.
E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:
1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to
05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
0707-2
improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or
other adjusting devices.
3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids
remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required.
Field Assembly:
1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the
various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact
before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances.
3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature
of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection
and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service.
4. Splice members only where shown or specified.
G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds
and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
H. Comply with AISC Specifications: Forbearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and
the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
1. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary
bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the
structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress,
as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when
permitted.
K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
L. Shear Connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material,
such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in
obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting.
M. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors
required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. _
END OF SECTION 05120
This Section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E.
(MWM Architects, Inc.)
STRUCTURAL STEEL
f * .. '• ••'�*
k: ;tiF
J L P. 081NETT
71085 .'
�l�. .....icy
05120-5
0707-2
,_ ,,
.= SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein
specified.
1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for:
a. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists
b. KCS-Series Open Web Steel Joists
B. Qualification of Welding Work:
1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made bywelding and shall complywith
the SJI "Standard Specifications" and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel
Joists".
2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and
replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds
are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide
new acceptable work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists:
1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute.
2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that
joists comply with SJI "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of
each instruction has been distributed to the Erector.
B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists:
1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and
accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle and
store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.
B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point
sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will
not be permitted.
C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Brace joists
in an upright position until hoisted onto structure.
STEEL JOISTS 05210 -1
0707-2
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications"
B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel.
C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not
permitted.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications".
B. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with the manufacturer's
standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Standard Specifications" and load tables.
C. Bottom Chord Ceiling Extensions: Provide bottom chord ceiling extensions on the b000m chord of
all joists for this project.
D. Bridging:
1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI "Standard
Specifications".
2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at beams or walls.
E. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with
SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated.
F. Shop Painting:
1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories before application of shop paint.
2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray,
dipping,.or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50
mil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify
the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Erector.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings,
and as herein specified.
B. Bearing Plates:
1. Furnish bearing plates to be built into the masonry construction.
a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry.
C. Placing Joists:
1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place
joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before
permanently fastening.
05210 - 2 STEEL JOISTS
0707-2
2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during
construction.
D. Bridging:
1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads are applied.
Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminated at beams or walls.
E. Fastening Joists:
1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard
specifications" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with
the placing of joists.
2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications" for
the type of joists used.
3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Touch -Up Painting:
1. After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty
surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent
before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05210
This Section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
f*
JOEL P. ROBINETT
!rrrrrrrrr7s.rrrr..rr4s.r,..r•
71085 r.
Z. 14e. 0 Y
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3
r_
i
0707-2
SECTION 05501 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Rough hardware
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates
3. Loose steel lintels
4. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections
5. Miscellaneous steel trim
6. Shelf and relieving angles
7. Guardrails and handrails
8. Metal stairs
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E985 for railing -related terms apply to this Section.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate and install the following metal fabrications to
withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of
the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the
maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections that illustrate all metal fabrications to be incorporated into the Work.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and
grout.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal
fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded
measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delay of Work.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means
not satisfying structural performance requirements.
2. Mount handrails only on assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of
concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05501 - 1
0707-2
t ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work,
provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and freedom from surface
blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, roughness and for steel sheet variations in flatness exceeding those permitted
by reference standards for stretcher -leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.
C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, grade as indicated below:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.
D. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as
follows:
1. Cold -Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A611, grade as follows:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
2. Hot -Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A570, grade as follows:
a. Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight, type and
grade required by structural loads.
F. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron,
ASTM A47 or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip
galvanized per ASTM A153.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
G. Drilled -In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group Vill
(anchors, expansion, [non -drilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor) and
machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
05501 -2 METAL FABRICATIONS
0707-2
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free,
universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for
field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS
TT-P-645.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re -galvanizing welds in galvanized steel,
with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-
21035 or SPC-Paint-20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SPC-Paint 12 except containing no
asbestos fibers.
D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness and shapes indicated but not less than
that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or
accepted on Shop Drawings using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials
indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
I. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws and similar items.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05501 - 3
0707-2
K. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weepholes
where water may accumulate.
2.5 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock
rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections.
B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable -iron washers for
heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with application standard listed below:
1. ASTM A123 for galvanizing steel andiron products
2. ASTM A153/A153M, for galvanizing, steel andiron hardware
2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill
plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.
2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches
bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize all steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of
structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other
construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates and
steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units
to receive hardware, hangers and similar items.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units
from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars with continuously welded joints and smooth
exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and
anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
B. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:
1. Exterior locations
2. Interior locations where indicated
05501 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS
0707-2
i
2.11 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES 1
A. Fabricate shelf and relieving angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to f
concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts spaced not more than 6 inches
from ends and not more than 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual' for recommendations relative to application and
designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13 INDUSTRIAL STAIR TREAD GRATING
A. Industrial Stair Tread Grating shall be equal to galvanized steel "Close Mesh" panels with press
locked cross bars and small openings that permit high heel shoe and foot traffic.
B. Provide Mebac surfaced steel angle nosings on all stair treads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project Site.
B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces.
C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water
and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; include threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other
connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment and
elevation with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true and free of rack and measured from
established lines and levels.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded
areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to
comply with SPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05501 - 5
0707-2
B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 05501
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
05501-6 METAL FABRICATIONS
f
1
0707-2
SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
t
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim and rails
2. Exterior miscellaneous ornamental items
3. Exterior/Interior Wood Columns
4. Shop Priming of Exterior Woodwork
5. Round Gable Units
6. Siding
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking and other carpentry that is not
exposed to view.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for back priming and finishing of exterior architectural woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into
items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Apply "AWI Certified Compliance Label" to first page of shop drawings.
D. Samples for verification purposes of the following:
1. Lumber and panel products for factory -applied opaque finish, 8- 'Y2 inches by 11 inches for
panels and 50 square inches for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one half of
exposed surface finished with coating specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
E. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses,
names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork
similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units
without causing delay in the Work.
B. Single -Source Fabrication and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer to
assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication and
installation.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -1
i
0707-2
C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and
quality to those required for this Project.
-- D. AW I Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AW I), except as otherwise indicated.
E. Mock-up Panel: Construct a mock-up panel that utilizes all trim, siding, flashing, brick, overhangs,
shingles, gutters and downspouts in their final finishes for review and approval prior to the start of
construction. Once approved, this panel shall constitute the quality standard of all exterior work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's and Installer's
coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its
storage.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcement that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish and guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without
field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site. Coordinate other construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC woodworking standard for
each type of woodwork and WIC quality grade indicated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI Woodworking Standard for
each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior or Medium Density Overlay (MDO)
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture
content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and
in installation areas.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch.
2. Edges of rails and similar members 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch.
06401 -2 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
0707-2
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to
project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting..
D. Factory -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal edges with a
water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AW I Section 300.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for
members with ends exposed in finished work.
C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
D. Grade: Custom.
E. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard.
1. Sort lumber stock to eliminate flat -sawed pieces whose exposed flat surfaces are more than
3 inches wide.
2.4 EXTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard.
2.5 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111
for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer.
B. Nails: Provide the following of type and size required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for
applicable requirements.
1. Stainless steel nails
2. Aluminum nails
3. Hot -dipped galvanized nails
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for corrosion
resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent
woodwork anchorage.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one (1) coat of primer as
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -3
i
L_ e
0707-2
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and/or edges, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one (1) coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two (2) coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or
masonry and to end -grain surfaces or end cut surfaces.
{ 2.7 ROUND LOUVERS
A. Round Louvers shall be equal to a high density polymer (Urethane) Round Ventilating Louver with
insect screening as manufactured by Melton Classics (800) 963-3060.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance
of time substrates are to be built.
C. Before installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install exterior woodwork to comply with requirements of AWI Section 1700
"Installation of Woodwork (Interior)" and/or with manufacturer's recommendation which ever is
applicable that refer to types of woodwork specified in this section and that apply to the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with W IC Section 26 for same grade specified in Part
2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in V-0"for plumb and level and with no variations
in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork.
F. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using
full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
G. Siding: Install Siding in strict compliance with Manufacturer's recommendations especially with
respect to Handling & Storage, Cutting Procedures, Framing Requirements, Grade Clearance, Roof
Clearance, Installation over Concrete orCMU Construction, Blind Nailing Procedures and Finishing.
H. Refer to the Division 9 Sections for back priming and final finishing of installed architectural
woodwork.
06401 - 4 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
t_
0707-2
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial?
Completion.
END OF SECTION 06401
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 5
0707-2
I.. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking, cants and nailers.
4. Roof Sheathing.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application
details.
1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of
preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.
2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both
before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according
to ASTM D5516 and ASTM D5664.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that
moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before
shipment to Project Site.
4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for
each type of treatment.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and
design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of
Review.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1
0707-2
code in effect for Project:
1. Preservative -treated wood.
2. Engineered wood products.
3. Power -driven fasteners.
4. Powder -actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, - acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548.
B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered
wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Obtain each type of
fire -retardant -treated wood product through one source from a single producer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
a. Laminated -Veneer Lumber:
i) Boise Cascade Corporation.
ii) Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
iii) Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
iv) Pacific Woodtech Corp.
v) Trus Joist MacMillan.
vi) Union Camp Corp.; Building Products Division.
1) Willamette Industries, Inc.
2. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
C. Haden Metal Products, Inc.
d. KC Metals Products, Inc.
e. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
f. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc.
g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc
h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark
grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
06100 -2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
0707-2
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by
DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are
indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
a. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at
time of dressing for 2-inch nominal or less, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or
evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with
allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or
exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less
than thickness indicated.
4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
2.03 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and, except that
lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid
water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use
chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed
through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements
for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency
approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit
marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping,
and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers,
and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed
members in contact with concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact
with earth.
E. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Where fire -retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is indicated,
pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire -retardant chemicals to comply
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3
I
0707-2
with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify '
"FRTW" lumberwith appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.04 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American
Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading
agency indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content: All structural framing lumber to be used at 19%
maximum moisture content.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including
the following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Blocking.
3. Cants.
4. Nailers.
B. For all other items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 and better with 19
percent maximum moisture content of the following species:
1. Hem -fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.06 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated -Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily
parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying
with ASTM D2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined
according to ASTM D5456:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12-inch nominal
depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,900,000 psi
2.07 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch.
2.08 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less
than '/ inch thick.
2.09 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area
of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM Al53/A153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
06100 -4 ROUGH CARPENTRY -
0707-2
C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME 1318.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1. ASME B18.2.3.8M.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A ASTM F568M, Property
Class 4.6; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification
A -A 1923A, Type 4.
2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity,
type, and size indicated, and as follows:
1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports
exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application
indicated, with building code in effect for Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as
published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or
by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Manufacturers standard G90 zinc galvanizing finish.
C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers as noted on the Drawings.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line,
cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed
for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to
comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
t
B.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that
are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of
preservative -treated lumber and plywood
D.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer
3. Table No. 2304.9.1 "Fastening Schedule" in the 2003 IBC.
E.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.
F.
Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail
heads and fill holes with wood filler.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5
0707-2
3.02 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work.
Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. f 1
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush
with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to t
formwork before concrete placement.
3.03 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
I
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to -
comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal dimension lumber on edge are
required, fasten together as called for on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 06100
This section has been prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
..
JOEL P. R€}BINETT
-w- _ 71085 -
2. 1 r. 0j,
06100 -6 ROUGH CARPENTRY
0707-2
SECTION 06192 — METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Triangular -pitched roof trusses
2. Girder trusses
3. Truss accessories.
B. Related Section: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing of structural use
panels and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent
bracing.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal plate connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of
metal plate connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and
assembled before delivery to Project site.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate and erect metal place connected wood
trusses to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required.
1. Design Loads: As indicated
2. Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than
the following:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 11240 of span due to total load
b. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span due to live load
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who uses a qualified professional
engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings and other structural data for metal
plate connected wood trusses.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Date for lumber, metal plate connectors, metal, framing connectors, bolts
and fasteners.
C. Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, clamber, configuration and spacing
for each type of truss required; species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be
used; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values and orientation and
location of metal connector plates; and bearing details.
1. To the extent truss design considerations are indicated as fabricators
responsibility, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Include truss Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional
METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 -1
0707-2
engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm certifying that metal
plate connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified
requirements and Shop Drawings.
E. Qualification date for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners
and other information specified.
F. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire retardant treated wood products
with requirements indicated.
G. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and
design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC)
Board of Review.
H. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that evidence the following products' compliance with
building code in effect for Project.
1. Metal plate connectors
2. Metal framing connectors
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed wood
truss installation similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Engage a firm that complies with the following
requirements for quality control and is experienced in fabricating metal plate
connected wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance:-
1. Fabricator participates in a recognized quality assurance program that
involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; Truss Plate
Institute (TPI); or other independent inspecting and testing agency
acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following
publications:
1. ANSI/TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood
Truss Construction."
2. TPI HIB "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing &
Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
3. TPI DSB "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
D. Metal Plate Connector Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a
member of TPI ands that complies with TPI quality control procedures for
manufacture of connector plates published in ANSI/TPI 1.
E. Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates
from one source and by a single manufacturer.
Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of AFPA's
"National Design Specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement.".
06192 - 2 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
0707-2
r>
G.
Single Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by metal
plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads
r
indicated, with design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer.
H.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
authorized to practice in the State of Texas and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in installing metal plate
connected wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
j$ 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending.
B.
Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion or other evidence of deterioration.
Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
1J,1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid
delaying of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
progress
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
b. Haden Metal Products, Inc.
C. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
d. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc.
e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. United Steel Products Co.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber
Standard," and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference
them, include the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian)
3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp
of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and
identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content attime of surfacing and
METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 -3
0707-2
mill.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20
for moisture content specified, to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
E. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and
web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required
loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National
Design Specification for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
2.03 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. General: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with requirements
indicated below.
1. Metal connector plates shall be manufactured by a Wood Truss Council of
America ("WTCA") member plate manufacturer.
2. Shall not be less than 0.036 inches in thickness (20 gauge) and shall meet
or exceed ASTM A653/A653M Grade 33.
3. Shall have a galvanized coating that meets or exceeds ASTM A924JA924M,
coating designation G60.
4. Working stresses in steel are to be applied to effectiveness ratios for plates
as determined by test and in accordance with ANSI/TPI 1.
2.04 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified below for material and manufacture.
1. Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidities,
provide fasteners with a hot dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of stainless
steel, Type 304 or 316.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105
C. Power Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1
E. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M)
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568, Property Class
4.6); with ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size, metal and
finish indicated that comply with requirements specified, including the following:
1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code
research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for
application indicated with building code in effect for this Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as
published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or
by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot dip, zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653,
06192 - 4 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
0707-2
G60 (ASTM A653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial or lock
forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC Paint 20 or DOD-13-21035 with dry film containing
a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting
joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage
details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means
to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply
with tolerances of ANSIITPI 1. Position members to produce design camber
indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously into both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install wood trusses until supporting construction is in place and is braced
and secured.
B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
C. Trusses shall be unloaded in a manner so as to minimize lateral strain. Trusses
shall protected from damage that might result from on -site activities and
environmental conditions. Trusses shall -be handled in such a way as to prevent
toppling when banding is removed.
D. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses
required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out of plane
bending or other causes.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for the handling, installation and temporary bracing
of the Trusses in a good workmanlike manner and in accordance with the
recommendations set forth in WTCA/TPI's Building Component Safety Information
BCSI 1-03: Guide to Good Practice For Handling, Installing & Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses.
F. Install trusses plumb, square and true to line and securely fasten to supporting
construction.
G. Space, adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening and as
follows:
1. Truss Spacing: 24 inches o.c.
H. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points using metal framing anchors. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 -5
0707-2
I. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.
J. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction
loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or
beams.
1. Trusses shall be anchored or restrained to prevent out -of -plane movement
so as to keep all Truss members from simultaneously buckling together in
the same direction. Such permanent lateral bracing shall be accomplished
by:
a. Anchorage to solid end walls
b. Permanent diagonal bracing in the plane of the web members, or
C. Other suitable means.
2. Materials used in temporary and permanent bracing shall be furnished by
the Contractor.
K. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
L. Do not cut or remove truss members.
M. Return wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements to fabricator
and replace with trusses that do meet requirements.
1. Do not alter trusses in the field.
3.02 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair
paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 06192
This Section prepared by Joel P. Robinett, P.E. (MWM Architects, Inc.)
fir: _ :tit
JOEL P. .... ETT
71085
Z./Yot
06192 - 6 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
0707-2
SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A, Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim and rails
2. Exterior miscellaneous ornamental items
3. Exterior/Interior Wood Columns
4. Shop Priming of Exterior Woodwork
5. Round Gable Units
6. Siding
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking and other carpentry that is not
exposed to view.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for back priming and finishing of exterior architectural woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into
items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C.
Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Apply "AWI Certified Compliance Label' to first page of shop drawings.
D.
Samples for verification purposes of the following:
1. Lumber and panel products for factory -applied opaque finish, 8- 1/2 inches by 11 inches for
panels and 50 square inches for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one half of
exposed surface finished with coating specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
E.
Product certificates signed bywoodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
F.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses,
names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork
similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units
without causing delay in the Work.
B. Single -Source Fabrication and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer to
assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication and
installation.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1
0707-2
C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and
quality to those required for this Project.
D. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated.
E. Mock-up Panel: Construct a mock-up panel that utilizes all trim, siding, flashing, brick, overhangs,
shingles, gutters and downspouts in their final finishes for review and approval prior to the start of
construction. Once approved, this panel shall constitute the quality standard of all exterior work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's and Installer's
coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its
storage.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcement that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish and guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without
field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site. Coordinate other construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC woodworking standard for
each type of woodwork and WIC quality grade indicated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI Woodworking Standard for
each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, exterior or Medium Density Overlay (MDO)
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture
content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and
in installation areas.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1116 inch.
2. Edges of rails and similar members 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 118 inch.
06401 -2 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
0707-2
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to
project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components onlyas necessaryfor shipment
and installation. Where necessaryfor fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting.
D. Factory -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal edges with a
water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AW I Section 300.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for
members with ends exposed in finished work.
C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
D. Grade: Custom.
E. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard.
1. Sort lumber stock to eliminate flat -sawed pieces whose exposed flat surfaces are more than
3 inches wide.
2.4 EXTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AW I Section 700.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard.
2.5 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111
for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer.
B. Nails: Provide the following of type and size required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for
applicable requirements.
1. Stainless steel nails
2. Aluminum nails
3. Hot -dipped galvanized nails
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for corrosion
resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent
woodwork anchorage.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one (1) coat of primer as
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 3
i
i
0707-2
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and/or edges, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one (1) coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply two (2) coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or
masonry and to end -grain surfaces or end cut surfaces.
2.7 ROUND LOUVERS
A. Round Louvers shall be equal to a high density polymer (Urethane) Round Ventilating Louver with
insect screening as manufactured by Melton Classics (800) 963-3060.
2.8 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WOOD COLUMNS
A. Columns shall be Koll's Lock -Joint Stave Constructed wood columns manufactured y Hartman
Sanders (H&S) or approved equal.
B. Column design Plan Types A&B shall be equal to H&S Design for Tuscan shafts with # 205 Ionic
Flutes, Tuscan Capitals, Tuscan Bases and Tuscan Plinths in eight (8) inch, twelve (12) inch and
eighteen (18) inch bottom diameters in length as required by the work or as shown on the Drawings.
C. Lumber species for both interior and exterior columns shall be Ponderosa Pine.
D. Materials:
1. All glue joints shall be pressure -glued with Type I waterproof glue.
2. All Columns shall be factory coated with two (2) applications of primer and sanded as required.
All exterior columns shall be coated inside with an asphaltum for moisture resistance.
3. Plinths, Capitals and Bases shall be fiberglass for exterior applications and wood for interior
application.
4. Provide factory supplied flashing as required by the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance
of time substrates are to be built.
C. Before installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop- fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install exterior woodwork to comply with requirements of AWI Section 1700
"Installation of Woodwork (Interior)" and/or with manufacturer's recommendation which ever is
applicable that refer to types of woodwork specified in this section and that apply to the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with W IC Section 26 for same grade specified in Part
2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level and with no variations
in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
06401 - 4 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
0707-2
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork.
F. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using
full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
G. Siding: Install Siding in strict compliance with Manufacturer's recommendations especially with
respect to Handling & Storage, Cutting Procedures, Framing Requirements, Grade Clearance, Roof
Clearance, Installation over Concrete or CMU Construction, Blind Nailing Procedures and Finishing.
H. Refer to the Division 9 Sections for back priming and final finishing of installed architectural
woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 06401
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 5
i
0707-2
SECTION 07211 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed building and/or ceiling/roof insulation
2. Safing insulation
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for insulation installed in metal stud walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the conditions of the contract and division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source responsibility for insulation products: obtain each type of Building insulation from a
single source with resources to provide products compiling with requirements indicated without
delaying the work.
B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire test
response characteristics indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere in this section as determined
by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency applicable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate marking of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface burning characteristics: ASTM E84
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and
other handling, storing and protecting during installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the
following:
1. Glass -Fiber Insulation:
a. Certain Teed Corporation
b. Kuauf Fiber Glass Gmbh
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation
d. Schuller International, Inc.
BUILDING INSULATION 07211 -1
0707-2
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulation materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
B. Unfaced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing).
1. Surface burning characteristics: maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25
and 50.
C. Faced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combing mineral fibers of type
-` described belowwith thermostading resins to complywith ASTM C665, Type III, Class A (Blankets
with reflective vapor -retarder membranefacing and flame spread of 25 or less); with foil-scrim-kraft
vapor -retarder membrane on one face.
1. Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass
2.3 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES
A. Safing insulation shall be equal to Thermal Fiber Safing Insulation as manufactured by United
States Gypsum Co.
B. Caulking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer for safing insulation for sealing joint
between backing of safing insulation and edge of roof deck or adjacent construction against
penetration of smoke.
C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacture of sealing insulation for
holding safing insulation in place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of punching vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at anytime to ice and
snow.
C. Extended insulation in thickness indicated to envelope area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Apply layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated.
07211 - 2 BUILDING INSULATION
0707-2
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufactures written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Set vapor -retarder -faced -units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
C. Install mineral —fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. W here more than
one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges
of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION
A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between wall/floor penetration material and edge of adjacent
materials where shown on the Drawings or as required by the Work on safing clips spaced as
needed to support insulation, but not further apart than 24 inches (610mm) O.C. Cut safing
insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and
edge of slab with caulking approved by safing insulation manufacture for this purpose. Leave no
voids in completed installation.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF METAL BUILDING ROOF INSULATION
A. Install as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Seal joints as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF RIGID WALL INSULATION
A. Install as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF RIGID WALL INSULATION VAPOR BARRIER
A. Install as recommended by the manufacturer.
t_
B. Install on warm side of wall.
C. Seal all joints as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposers, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or encloses where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be controlled and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07211
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
BUILDING INSULATION 07211 - 3
I'
0707-2
SECTION 07611 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pre -finished metal counter flashing and base flashing (if any)
2. Pre -finished metal wall flashing and expansion joint covers
3. Pre -finished miscellaneous sheet metal accessories
4. Pre -finished gutters and scuppers
5. Metal roof and soffit panels and underlayment
B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as Masonry Work in Sections of Division 4
C. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in Roofing System
Sections as roofing work.
D. Roof accessory units of premanufactured, set -on type are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data,
installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and
fabricated product.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of
materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Copper: ASTM 370; temper HOO, except where o6o is required for forming, 16 oz., except where
shown otherwise.
B. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A526 except ASTM A527
. y for lock -forming, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359 —
inch thick (20 gage),except as otherwise indicated.
C. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:
1. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B32), with rosin
} flux.
2. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur,
3 compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non -
hardening, non -skinning, non-drying, non -migrating sealant.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07611 - 1
0707-2
3. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
4. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet
5. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory
units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
non -corrosive, size and gage required for performance.
6. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material recommended
by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with
minimum stress on flashing sheet. '
7. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic.
8. Roof Expansion Joint Covers: Equal to Expand-O-Flash curb to curb and curb to wall with
required factory -fabricated intersections in both curved and straight lengths (as required by the
Work) as manufactured by Johns Manville.
2.2 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details
shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance, with
expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or
deterioration of the Work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer
instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without
excessive oil -canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated with exposed edges
folded back to form hems. ALL EXPOSED TO VIEW FLASHING and COUNTER FLASHING plus
COPING/CAP FLASHING SHALL BE PRE -FINISHED in colors selected from the manufacturer's
full array of colors.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For metal other than
aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy
seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used
or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper
performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA Standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates
by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
F. All exposed metal fabrications, including but not limited to gutters, scuppers, flashing, counter
flashing, shall be factory painted in colors as selected from all available manufacturer's colors to
either match the metal roof color or the adjacent wall finish color.
2.3 METAL STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS AND SMOOTH SOFFIT PANELS
A. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels shall be equal to the 24 ga. LokSeam System Panels as
manufactured by MBCi Manufacturing. Color shall be equal to the MBCI Factory Applied Paint
System in a color(s) that matches the existing green roof color found at the Police Firing Range.
The width of the roof panels shall also match the existing roof panel width found at the Police Firing
Range.
B. Wind Uplift rating shall be a Class 1-90.
07611 - 2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
0707-2
C. The roof panel factory applied paint color(s) shall be equal to the MBCI Factory Applied Paint
System and shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full array of available (all
colors) fluorocarbon and/or thermoset coating system colors. The color (s) shall be dark green to
match the green color installed on the existing Police Firing Range Building.
D. Provide all factory finished 22 gage metal trim gutters, scuppers, hat sections, channel sections,
sub -grits and accessories as shown in the Drawings or as required by the Work.
E. Install Standing Seam Roof Panels as recommended by the manufacturer on a self -adhering
membrane and stripping piles equal to Carlisle Dri-Start "HR" Roofing Underlayment, 40 mils thick.
2.4 END WALL METAL PANELS
A. End Wall Metal Panels shall be equal to MBCI FW 120-0. Color shall be selected from
manufacturers full array of standard factory applied paint colors to match the existing metal roof
installed on the existing Police Firing Range Buildings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work
securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal
fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,
joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. General: Except as otherwise indicated, use copper sheet metal where flashing/trim, etc. is
exposed to view from the ground.
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
D. Install elastomeric flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required,
provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler
strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing sheets
with adhesive; seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate
seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form a continuous, waterproof
system.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings
and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that Work will be without damage or
deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07611
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07611 - 3
F ,,
i
0707-2
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry
b. Joints between different materials
c. Perimeter joints between materials and at perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows
d. Other joints as indicated or as required by the Work.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings
c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows
d. Other joints as indicated or as required by the Work.
C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing".
D. Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission
characteristics is specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall".
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and
airtight continuous seals.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for
joint preparation and joint sealer application.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips
of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with
specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years
at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealer based on tests
conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratoryon current product formulations within a 24
month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal results to Architect.
JOINT SEALERS 07901 -1
0707-2
D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint
substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealers, apply elastomeric
sealants to the following selected building joints as indicated below for further verification
of colors selected from sample submittals and to represent completed work for qualities
of appearance, materials and application:
1) Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections which
are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section.
2) Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed construction.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint
sealer manufacturers.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less
than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installations of joint sealers until contaminants
capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
ry PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. In general the color of the sealant should match
or be compatible with the adjoining material's color.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those
_t
referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B.
One -Part Non -acid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 and complying with the
following requirements for Uses and additional joint movement capability:
1. Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
C.
One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and, as
applicable to nonporous joint substrates; intended for sealing joints with nonporous substrates and
subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.
D.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. One -Part Non -acid -Curing Silicone Sealant:
a. "Dow Corning 790'; Dow Corning Corp.
b. "Silglaze II 2800'; General Electric Co.
c. "Silpruf; General Electric Co.
07901 - 2 JOINT SEALERS
I`
0707-2
r..
d. "864'; Pecora Corp.
e. "Spectrum 1"; Tremco, Inc.
f. "Spectrum 2'; Tremco, Inc.
Horizontal Sealant Joints
a. Equal to Dow Corning "SL"
2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of
flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and
of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise
indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants only.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM
D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26
deg F (-15 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide
a secondary seal, to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant tojoint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests
and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non -staining, chemical cleaners of type which are
acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to
substrates and adjacent nonporous materials and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise
have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.
C. Masking Tape: Provide non -staining, non -absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements forjoint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer
performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply
with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint
JOINT SEALERS 07901 - 3
f
i
0707-2
sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved
for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer, old joint sealers, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellants, water, surface dirt and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non -porous
surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of
joint sealer bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
4' 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to complywith the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths: which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints
where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated
above for joint fillers.
C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
D. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate
air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess
sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or
adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints
occur.
07901 - 4 JOINT SEALERS
L_
0707-2
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and
reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas
indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07901
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
f
JOINT SEALERS 07901 - 5
1
j
0707-2
i
SECTION 08110- STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on Drawings.
B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8.
C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4
D. Blast/Breach Doors
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard
Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide
fire -rated frame assemblies that complywith NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows" and
have been tested, listed and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152 "Standard Methods of Fire
Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints
and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings
as those on Contract Drawings.
2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.
Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise,
remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood
blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber.
If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces
between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS 08110 - 1
0707-2
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel
doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames, (General):
a. Allied Steel Products, Inc.
b. Anweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co.
c. Ceco Corp.
d. Copco Door Co.
e. Curries Mfg., Inc.
f. Dittco Products, Inc.
g. Fenestra Corp.
h. Kewanee Corp.
i. Mesker Industries, Inc.
j. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc.
k. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co.
I. Trussbilt, Inc.
m. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying
with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568.
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM
A568.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with
ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel.
E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be
built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable.
F. Shop Applied Paint:
1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for
specified finish paints.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp
or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify
work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly
at Project Site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows:
1. Interior Doors: SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Modell, minimum 18 gage faces
2. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 16 gage faces
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non -flush units, from only
cold -roiled steel.
C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from
either cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS I
0707-2
D. Fabricate all doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges
of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted
steel channels.
E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
F. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish
hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware
supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware.
1. Reinforce frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied
finish hardware may be done at Project Site.
2. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance
with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware
Institute.
G. Shop Painting:
1. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized
surfaces.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before
application of paint.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface
ready to receive finish paint.
2.4 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on Drawings or schedules.
B. Doors shall be reinforced as necessary for hardware, glass lights or other associated accessories.
C. Provide glass light trim for glazing by others at the Job Site.
D. Provide insulation in all exterior doors.
2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights and other openings of types,
sizes and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold -rolled furniture steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction for exterior and interior
applications.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs
of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back
of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and
to close off interior of openings.
2.6 BREACHING DOORS
A. Ram Type Breaching Doors shall be BTI RAM DOOR Model 01-RD Doors as manufactured by
Breaching Technologies, Inc. (866) 552-7427. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Provide one (1) Unit.
B. Blast Type Breaching Door shall be BTI EXPLOSIVE Model 03-ED Doors as manufactured by
Breaching Technologies, Inc. (866) 552-7427. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Provide one (1) Unit.
STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS 08110 - 3
0707-2
C. Shotgun Type Breaching Door shall be as manufactured by Breaching Technologies, Inc. (866)
552-7427. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Provide one (1) Unit.
D. Pry Type Breaching Door shall be as manufactured by Breaching Technologies, Inc. (866) 552-
7427. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. Provide one (1) Unit.
E. Verify with the Owner the opening into which each Breaching Door is to be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard steel frames and accessories in accordance with final Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's data and as herein specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For
Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place
frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position,
plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction
is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels.
3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction
with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices.
4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80.
5. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In
open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud
partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
C. Door Installation:
1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
2. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior tofinal inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from
pre -finished doors.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08110
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
08110 - 4 STEEL DOORS, FRAMES AND BREACHING DOORS
�z
I
0707-2
SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of overhead coiling doors:
1. Powder -coated Exterior Insulated Sectional Garage Door
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying
2. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for electric service and connections for powered
operators and accessories
3. Division 16 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switcher and
circuit breakers for powered operator
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The
door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of
door components:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and
outward.
B. Operation -Cycle Requirements: Design overhead coiling door components and operator to operate
for not less than 20,000 cycles.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead sectional garage door and accessory. Include
details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles and
finishes. Provide roughing -in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information.
Include the following:
1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor
devices.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's data sheets.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between
manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring and between components provided by door
manufacturer and those provided by others.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of finishes
available for units with factory -applied finishes.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS 08330 - 1
0707-2
f
D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Where finishes involve
normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations
expected.
1. Sectional Door Slats: 12-inch (300-mm) length
2. Bottom Bar: 6-inch (150-mm) length
3. Guides: 6-inch (150-mm) length
4. Brackets: 6 inches (150 mm) square
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
overhead coiling door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead sectional garage doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from the overhead sectional garage door manufacturer.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to one of the
following for the Overhead Sectional Garage Doors:
a. Exterior Insulated Sectional Garage Door shall be RITE HITE STEEL RITE II as
manufactured by Rite -Hite corporation (800)456-0600.
2. Provide a one piece track for the exterior sectional door.
2.2 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
2.3 METAL FINISHES
A. General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
B. Baked Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked finish consisting of primer and topcoat according to
coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, thermosetting
and minimum dry film thickness.
2.4 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Provide manual operators.
08330 - 2 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
i
i_
t :
0707-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head
mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or
distortion and fitting weather tight for entire perimeter.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup services
and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire -release system.
Reset door -closing mechanism after successful test.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance and procedures for testing and
resetting release devices.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Summary of the Work".
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 08330
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS 08330 - 3
0707-2
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS i
t _
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. See Section 01010 : SUMMARY OF WORK
B. This Section includes commercial -grade aluminum window units of the performance class
indicated. Window types required include:
1. A factory finished single hung windows with insulated glass glazing and snap.
2. A factory finished horizontal sliding windows with insulating glass glazing and snap.
C. Related Sections: Related Sections of this Specification include (but are not limited to) the following
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. SECTION 01010: SUMMARY OF WORK
2. SECTION 07900: JOINT SEALERS
1.3 SCOPE
A. Includes the complete installation of window units as shown and detailed. The installation shall be
complete with all necessary accessories, hardware and appurtenances required for a weathertight
installation.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance class number included as part of the window designation system is the actual design
pressure in pounds per sq. ft. used to determine the structural test pressure and water test
pressure.
1. Structural test pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.
2. Water leakage resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with
2.86 psf as a minimum.
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum window units that comply with performance requirements specified,
as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems according to test methods j
indicated.
-
B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration
requirements indicated in AAMA DH-R25 ANSI/AAMA 101-88 specifications for type, grade, and
performance class of window units required, and as further specified herein.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each type of windciw required, including:
a. Construction details and fabrication methods.
b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
2. Shop Drawings for each type of window required. Include information not fully detailed in
manufacturer's standard product data and the following:
a. Layout and installation details, including anchors
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -1
0707-2
b. Glazing details
c. Accessories
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of
aluminum windows similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Standards: Requirements for aluminum windows, terminology and standards of performance, and
fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in AAMA 101 and applicable
general recommendations published by AAMA.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Aluminum Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air infiltration.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as follows:
1. Single Hung Aluminum Window shall be equal to Alenco Series 3710 with factory installed
5/8"insulated glass and a factory finished acrylic white painted finish. Provide aluminum frame
and fiberglass mesh insect screen.
2. Aluminum Horizontal Slider shall be equal to Alenco Series 3724N with factory installed 5/8"
insulating glass and a factory finished acrylic white painted finish. Provide aluminum frame and
fiberglass mesh insect screen.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window manufacturer for the
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi
ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash
members.
B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials
warranted by the manufacturer to be non -corrosive and compatible with aluminum window
members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.
08520-2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
0707-2
i
:
C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot -dip zinc -coated steel or iron complying with the
requirements of ASTM B633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Compression -Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at the
manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as
molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with AAMA SG-1 or with ASTM D2000 Designation
2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D2287, or molded expanded
EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C509, Grade 4.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard window latch hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient
strength to perform the function for which it is intended.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete
system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
2. Window sash or ventilators shall be pre -glazed at the factory.
B. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with AAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application
and designations of finishes specifically in accordance with AAMA 603.8.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AK conform to the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Finish shall be Factory applied/ finished Acrylic White Paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. See SECTION 01010 for scheduling work. No window openings shall be left open overnight or
during inclement weather.
B. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and
the sill plate is level.
1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction
debris.
2. Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag;
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units,
hardware, operators, and other components of the work.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3
I
0707-2
B. Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Separate
aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
..3 of contact with other materials.
C. Set all window members in a bed of non -hardening mastic compound compatible with aluminum
to provide a weathertight construction. Seal between window units and adjacent construction as
specified under SECTION 07901 - SEALANTS.
D. As directed by the Owner, screw all clubhouse single hinge operable sash in a closed or shut
position.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage
to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
B. Clean glass of pre -glazed units promptly after installation of windows. Comply with requirements
of the "Glass and Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the
construction period, to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free of
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08520
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
08520-4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION '08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or
scheduled on the drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary and required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned,
but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided
without additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior
to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications will be considered complete.
B. Related work
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of
these specifications.
2. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames
Section 09211 - Flush Wood Doors
Section 08212 - Plastic Faced Wood Doors
Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen,who are -thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crofts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work of the Section.
B. Where items of hardware herein are specified by reference numbers, they are taken from the current
catalogs of manufacturers listed on the schedule. Refer to the general contractor's limited options for
acceptable items of hardware and suppliers. Finishes and sizes shall be as specified on the Hardware
Schedule, subject to the stated permissible option.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Supplementary General Conditions.
B. Within twenty (20) calendar days after the contractor has received the owners notice to proceed
submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule covering all finished hardware for the building.
Resubmittals will be required until complete architectural approval is obtained. Schedule shall
include the specified or approved optional hardware, keying and template information. Keying codes
shall be noted on the left margin of the schedule opposite each item of hardware requiring mortising
or internal reinforcing of metal doors and/or frames. Degrees of opening and handling information
shall also be listed. No hardware shall be ordered or templates issued until complete architectural
approval is obtained.
C. On receipt of the approved schedule, contractor shall issue sufficient copies as required by the general
contractor for his distribution to the trades designing them, and his own use. Copies for use by other
trades shall include all blueline template sheets necessary to those trades.
D. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to secure approval of the Keying Schedule from the Owner
and the Architect before ordering any hardware. When a key cabinet and construction Master Keying
is specified, no permanent keys shall be permitted on the job site until after Owner acceptance of the
project. At that time, the hardware subcontractor shall make personal delivery of the permanent keys,
tagged and pre -hung in the cabinet, to the Owner in converting the construction system to the
permanent system, fully explaining the keying system and making recommendations for -its
maintenance and control.
E. Copy of Schedule for use at the job site shall include a draw list of all hardware included in the
approved schedule to assist the general contractor for checking all incoming merchandise for
completeness. Shortages shall be immediately reported for possible replacement if lost or damaged in
shipment.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Hardware shall be adequately wrapped for protection in shipment. All hardware shall be labeled with
the manufacturer's name, catalog number, finish, size and screw information. Additionally, butt
hinges, closer, locksets, latches and all handed hardware shall be cartoned individually and marked
with heading (on item) number, door number, hand and keying information where applicable, to
correspond with the approved schedule. Partial shipments shall be accompanied with a packing list to
assist in checking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FINISH HARDWARE GENERAL
A. Items specified are to establish design, grade quality and function standards; the following are
acceptable limited options:
1. Hinges: Equal products manufactured by Hager or Stanley
2. Lockset: Corbin/Russwin ML200
Schlage L Series
3. Closer: LCN Series 4041
Norton Series 7500
Yale Series 4400
4. Exit Device: Von Duprin Series 98 x 696
5. OH Holders: Equal products manufactured by Corbin/Russwin, Glynn
Johnson, Norton, Rixson and Yale
6. Misc. Trim: Equal products manufactured by Hager, Quality, Rockwood
and Trego are acceptable.
7. Weather Seals: Equal products manufactured by A.J. May, Hager, and
National Guard Products are acceptable.
8. Auxiliary Items: Equal products manufactured by CorbinlRusswin, Schlage,
Yale are acceptable.
2.2 LIMITATIONS OF HARDWARE SPECIFICATION
A. Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of
hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled
hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that required for similar
conditions on the project.
2.3 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/ 16"
Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48"
C. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 42" pull, 45" push
D. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12"
E. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions; Rails shall not conflict with door lites,
mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door mil
F. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions.
G. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting
doors
H. Butt Hinges:
I . Top anchor butt - per template instructions;
2. Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5"
3. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10"
4. Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts.
2.4 ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS
A. Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors
shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape
that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe
twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five lb.
Designs include lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms and U-shaped handles. When
sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors
to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to
other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a
textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface
maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured
surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to hazardous
areas.
B. Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from
an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to an open
position of approximately 12 degrees.
C. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this
paragraph. For hinge doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or
". 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the
force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch.
1. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lb. Slight increases in opening force shall be
allowed where 8.5 lb. is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials.
2. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding
five lbs.
3. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing
authority or applicable building code.
4. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other
devices that may hold the door in a closed position.
5. Forces for pushing or pulling doors open are measured with a push-pull gauge under the
following conditions.
a. Hinged Doors: Force applied perpendicular to the door opener or 30 in (760 nun)
from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge.
b. Sliding or Folding Doors: Force applied parallel to the door at the door pull or
latch.
C. Application of Force: Apply force gradually so that the applied force does not
exceed the resistance of the door. Air -pressure differentials may require a
modification of this specification in order to meet the functional intent.
D. Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect.
E. -Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at doorway
sills shall not exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1" in 2".
F. Hardware for all opening shall meet requirements of The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). In case of conflict materials of equivalent quality and
design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided.
2.5 GUARANTEES
Provide guarantees for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor for this transmittal to
the Owner. Guarantees shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [51 years for closer) from date of
Owner acceptance, against defects in material and workmanship of the merchandise. Guarantees shall
include the names, address and telephone number of the hardware subcontractor, as well as the
manufacturer's.
2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
t
Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1.
Cylinders: Manufacturer—s standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver, and complying with the following: t
Number of Pins: Six.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover -type cam.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
Bored -Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a fiictory-registered keying system complying with the
following requirements:
Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.
Cylinders shall be master keyed.
Keys: Provide nickel -silver keys complying with the following
Cylinder Change Keys: Two.
Master Keys: Six.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true, and in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by Architect. Hardware shall be
fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting completed before final installation.
All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from mars and blemishes, and in perfect operating
condition when turned over to the Owner. Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be
acceptable.
B. No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general
contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to receive
hardware.
C. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size
use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These fastenings
shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security bolts, toggle bolts or other
approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied and recommended by the
manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be furnished with machine screws and lead
shields.
D. Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be furnished where
strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended lips where required to protect
trim from being marred by latch -bolts, but no more than necessary. Strikes for pairs of doors shall
have 1" lips to center. All backset.z of locks and latches shall be 2-3/4" from the door edge unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In case of
conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type required for fire
protection, materials of equal quality and design without additional cost to Owner, required by NFPA
shall be furnished.
3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE
A. Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet with the
Owners maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and adjustment of all movable
hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a Manufacturer's Parts List for all locks,
exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment Manual, and an adjustment tool for each type of
adjustable hardware. Included shall be a copy of an approved Hardware Schedule.
3.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the
referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance
with the specified requirements.
B. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the
specified requirements, immediately remove the non -complying items and immediately replace them
with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and
reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection.
JOB: LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
ARCHITECT: MWM
HDWE SET #1
DOORS: TYPE 2 & 4
EACH TO HAVE:
ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER
HDWE SET #2
DOORS: # 5/102, 5/202
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA HINGES
T4A3786 4 % x 4 % 652
MCKINNEY
1 EA LOCKSET
8204 LW 1 L 626
SARGENT
1 EA STOP
409 630
ROCKWOOD
3 EA SILENCERS
608
ROCKWOOD
HDWE SET #3
DOORS: # 5/STAIR A
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA HINGES
T4A3786 4 '/2 x 4 1/2 652
MCKINNEY
I EA LOCKSET
8204 LW I L 626
SARGENT
I EA O/H STOP
9000 630
ABH
3 EA SILENCERS
608
ROCKWOOD
HDWE SET #4
DOORS: #6/201
EACH TO HAVE:
6 EA
HINGES
T4A3786 4 '/2 x 4 %2
652
MCKINNEY
1 EA
LOCKSET
8205 LW I L
626
SARGENT
2 EA
CLOSERS
351-C[SJ x TB
689
SARGENT
2 EA
FLUSHBOLTS
555
626
ROCKWOOD
I EA
THRESHOLD
170A
719
PEMKO
I EA
DR BOTTOM
315CN
628
PEMKO
1 SET
W/STRIPPING
303AS
719
PEMKO
1 EA
ASTRAGAL
357C
628
PEMKO
0707-2
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings.
B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction:
1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board.
2. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members.
C. Wood framing and furring are specified in the following Division 6 Sections:
1. "Rough Carpentry."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical
to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E119 by a
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment
-° materials from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification
of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise
damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain
not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain
not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until
f drying is complete.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 -1
I
0707-2
C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid
drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Bostwick Steel Framing Co.
b. Dale Industries, Inc.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. Incor, Inc.
e. Marino Industries Corp.
f. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a. Centex American Gypsum Co.
b. Domtar Gypsum Co.
c. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
e. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED OR FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Drywall framing shall be in accordance with USG Folder SA-923 and as follows:
1. All studs shall be 20 gauge.
2. All diagonal bracing shall be 20 gauge.
3. All horizontal bracing shall be 20 gauge.
B. All connections of joists, bracing, furring, etc. shall be with 5/8" S-12 pan head screws with a
minimum of four screws per connection.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. -
E. Flat Hangers Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint.
F. Angle -Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted
connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts.
G. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16
inch wide flanges, protected with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated.
H. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, hat -shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Depth: 7/8 inch
2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated
I. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other
properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved;
complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated.
09250 - 2 GYPSUM DRYWALL
0707-2
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end -
to -end joints.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ATSM C36, and as follows:
1. Type: Type "X" for fire -resistive -rated assemblies shall be 518 inch thick Dens Armor Plus
Fireguard paperless interior glass mat gypsum panels.
2. Edges: Tapered
3. Thickness: 518 inch where indicated
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control
joints which comply with ASTM C1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the
following requirement:
a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process.
2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C1047:
a. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated.
3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C1047, with slot
opening covered with removable strip.
_ 2.5 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C840, and recommendations of
manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with
compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint
treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder
products formulated for uses indicated.
1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds,
use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is
compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.
D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the
following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product.
2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project Site.
3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges
of corner beads and edge trim.
4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced
standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum
boards.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 3
0707-2
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting
hollow metal door frames.
2.7 TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish.
B. Texture Coat: Manufacturer's standard product for light orange peel finish as approved by the
Owner and the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames,
cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with
ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of
fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar
construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United
States Gypsum Co.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement, at locations indicated below.
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters
or penetration of structural elements.
2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members;
independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise
connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as required.
1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck.
3. Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with powder -actuated fasteners.
B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.
D. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with Hangers used for support.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than
that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.
09250 - 4 GYPSUM DRYWALL
0707-2
1 3.4 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with
ASTM C840.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed
after board has been installed.
C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not
less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.
D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints,
and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24
inches.
E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them
entirely where possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over
studs.
F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp
boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch
open space between boards. Do not force into place.
G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like
edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or
field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over
different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open
(unsupported) edge of stud flange first.
I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at
openings and cutouts.
J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over
32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame.
K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of
boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
L. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch
to % inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:
1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible.
2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
3. On partitions/walls 8'-V or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to
framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5
0707-2
4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.
Locate edge joints over furring members.
B. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for
face layer.
1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated, with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least
10 inches with base layer joints.
C. Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a
substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with
gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board
until fastening adhesive has set.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to
fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -
exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint
compound except where "U" bead (semi -finishing type) is indicated.
D. Vertically install control joint trim at the juncture of the top and jamb gypsum board edges of all
door, cased openings, window and/or storefront frames. If a window or door does not extend to the
floor, then control joint trim shall be installed vertically at the juncture of the sill and jamb condition,
and shall extend to the floor.
3.7 FINISHING OF DRYWALL
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead,
edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated.
D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including
prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat.
3.8 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance
with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to achieve texture finish.
B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive finish in
strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's
sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns.
C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other adjoining
construction.
09250 - 6 GYPSUM DRYWALL
0707-2
' 3.9 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures
X. gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 09250
3
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 7
t}#
t
0707-2
{
{
SECTION 09902 - PAINTING !
a,
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting and finishing of exposed interior and exterior
items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a
surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item
or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces.
If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color -
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
C. Painting is not required on pre -finished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces,
operating parts, and labels.
1. Pre -finished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components:
a. Precast Concrete
b. Brick and Exterior Tile
c. Metal Grating Panels
2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted unless noted otherwise include wall or ceiling surfaces
in the following generally inaccessible areas:
a. Foundation spaces
b. Furred areas
c. Duct shafts
3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Anodized aluminum
b. Stainless steel
c. Chromium plate
d. Copper
e. Bronze
f. Brass
g. Pre -finished metal grating panels
4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the
following:
a. Valve and damper operators
b. Linkages
c. Sensing devices
d. Motor and fan shafts
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required
labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Steel" for shop priming steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming ferrous metal used indoors and
frames fabrication.
PAINTING 09902 - 1
0707-2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for
each material proposed for use.
. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application.
Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
C. Samples for verification purposes: Provide 12 inch x 12 inch samples of each color and material
selected, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual
substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors
when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility
of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of
finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified.
C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products
named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.
r' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type)
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture
4. Thinning instructions
5. Application instructions
6. Color name and number
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or as recommended by the manufacturer. Maintain
containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and
health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) or as recommended by
the manufacturer.
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C) or as recommended by
the manufacturer.
09902 - 2 PAINTING
l
t .,
0707-2
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified bythe manufacturer during application
and drying periods.
2. DO NOT apply paint when weather forecasts predict the potential for wind blown dust/dirt
during the time required to apply paint and required time for applied paint to fully cure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS
A. Exterior and Interior Structural Ferrous And Galvanized Steel:
1. Primer: Epoxy primer/sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
equal to Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Epoxy B67W300 Series.
2. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at a spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a dry film thickness of 3.0 to 8.0 mils equal to Sherwin Williams Heavy Duty Epoxy
B67W300 series.
3. Topcoat: Semigloss, aliphatic polyurethane enamel applied at a spreading rate recommended
by manufacturers to achieve a dry film thickness of 2.0 to 4.0 mils equal to Sherwin Williams
Corothane II Low VOC Satin Finish B65W200 Series.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: (Water Based epoxy over a 100% Acrylic Block Filler)
1. First coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler — equal to Sherwin & Williams 1342W46
2. Second coat: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy— equal to Sherwin & Williams B70 (2.5-4.0 mils
DFT)
3. Third coat: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy — equal to Sherwin & Williams B70 (2.5-3.0 mils
DFT)
C. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats
a. Undercoat: Exterior Enamel Undercoat
b. First coat: Exterior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
c. Second coat: Exterior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
D. Gypsum Board:
1. Odorless, Eggshell Latex Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness no less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White, Interior, latex -based primer (FS TT-E-543)
b. First & Second coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, later
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with
requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and 'hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures and similar items in place that are not to be painted or provide surface -applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete
painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each
space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.
PAINTING 09902 - 3
0707-2
1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to
cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in
writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates
primed by others.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust,
dirt, grease, oils and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean non -galvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures
Painting Council.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush,
clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum -based solvents so that
the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments and finishes are indicated in "schedules."
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended
by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even
smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of
paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners, receive a dry
film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grille
covers, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as
required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
8. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until
paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
09902 - 4 PAINTING
0707-2
{
pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended
by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime
coated byothers. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
F. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence
of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections.
G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint
materials from the Site.
B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint
by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09902
THIS SECTION PREPARED BY MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
PAINTING 09902 - 5
0707-2
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguisher
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough -in
dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style
and materials.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of
colors available for those units with factory -applied color finishes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguisher and cabinets from one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguisher UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and
classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Allenco
a 2. Ansul Fire Protection, Wormald US Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
_.., 4. J.L. Industries
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
_.a 6. Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc.
7. Watrous Inc.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
A. General: Provide fire extinguisher for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in
colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, which comply with
requirements of governing authorities.
B. Schedule of Equipment:
1. FX-1: 10 lb. Multi -purpose, Fully recessed cabinet, equal to: Larsen MP10, 10#, 4A-60B:C.
t FIRE EXTINGUISHER, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1
-> AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 16
PROJECT NUMBER 1207061 ELECTRICAL
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARMENT
SIMUNITIONS FACILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
16000
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL......................................................1-6
16110
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS................................................................................
1-8
16115
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT...............................................................1-4
16120
CONDUCTORS........................................................................................................1-4
16140
WIRING DEVICES..................................................................................................1-4
16180
EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS..........................................1-3
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION..........................................................................1-2
16400
ELECTRICAL SERVICE.........................................................................................1-3
16441
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES ...........................
I ............... 1-3
16450
GROUNDING AND BONDING..............................................................................1-4
16470
PANELBOARDS......................................................................................................1-4
16475
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES ...... 1-3
16500
LIGHTING..................................................1-4
..............................................................
16915
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS.........................................................................1-2
+�E 0 r7o#
N............................... 0
0 REESE
„M
010+ A�c980 �o \ �AV
E
s
0707-2
SECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this
Section.
1.02 ELECTRICAL LINES
A. General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these Specifications shall be
run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and
as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a
neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the
running of electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the
building necessitate deviating from these standards.
B. General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of
the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made
because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry
walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required
by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction.
C. Field Conditions: The electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of
electrical lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation
details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the
architectural and structural conditions, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of
installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to
provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation.
D. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical Drawings show diagrammatically the
locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and
controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by
reference to the general Drawings and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings,
roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with
other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The
Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or
apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after
installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner.
E. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his
material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment that any bidder
proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings,
he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should
changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the
Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
F. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit scale working drawings of all his
apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these Specifications and
Drawings. The Architect shall check these variations from the Specifications and
Drawings before the work is started. Before the work proceeds, the contractor shall
correct any interference with the structural conditions.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-1
0707-2
G. Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying -out the conduit in
order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The
installation shall be coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall
govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting
fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the
site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose
function bends and offsets would not impair.
H. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in
the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be
contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as
close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
I. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in Drawings and
Specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed.
Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that
may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment.
J. Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the
work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a
finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be
included whether specifically mentioned or not.
K. Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the Drawings
and Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item
requiring work under Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective
Electrical drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding.
If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and
shall install the work as indicated on the General Drawings in accordance with the
Specifications.
1.03 DIMENSIONS
A. General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all
dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the
same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences
between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference
that may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding
with the work.
1.04 INSPECTION OF SITE
A. General: The accompanying Drawings do not indicate completely the existing electrical
installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the Specifications shall
inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to
be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work,
and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and
from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any
additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing
installations and/or installing any new work.
I 16000-2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
0707-2
1.05 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and
control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16
of these Specifications. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of
this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely
wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number
and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the
responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings
and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
1.06 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work
and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or
Owner.
1.07 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.08 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality
specified. Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for
which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by
the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label.
B. Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material
offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the
Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is
deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection.
This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be
applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment.
C. Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to
and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials
and work until the final acceptance of the job.
D. Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and
appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution
of his contract.
,1
E. Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all
construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade.
1.09 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to
properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all
required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on
the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the
covering of apparatus in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective
covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-3
0707-2
satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of
apparatus in question.
1.10 PERMITS, FEE, ETC.
A. General: The Contractor under each section of these Specifications shall arrange for a
permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services,
including electric services. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to
the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for
metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees
or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these Specifications.
1.11 TESTING
A. General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the
various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and
local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making
tests.
1.12 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national
codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as
interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final
execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these
Specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the
Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental
drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on
approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various
portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities,
approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
1.13 TERMINOLOGY
A. "Furnish, Provide, Install": Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install,"
"provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and
equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the
Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary.
B. Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or
otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the
material.
C. "Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
D. "Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
E. "Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
F. Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be
described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
16000-4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
0707-2
1.14 COOPERATION
A. General: The contractor for the work under each section of these Specifications shall
coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the Specifications to
the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his
work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these Specifications
shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time.
1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required
between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical
connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
B. Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with
the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected
ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary
to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his expense.
C. Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb,
level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural
and general construction modifications and cut all, openings through either roof, walls,
floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any
defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done
under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to
avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations.
B. Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would
tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do
such cutting.
C. Patching: The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the
patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the
damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder.
D. Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and
patching required with all trades.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 16000-5
0707-2
E. Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under
each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to
protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting
operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All
structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed
by the Architect.
1.17 PAINTING
A. General: Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows:
1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched
up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of
machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and
miscellaneous metal.
3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is
visible.
1.18 LARGE APPARATUS
A. General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the
building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts,
shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the
enclosing structure is completed.
1.19 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A. General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these
Specifications. The Contractor under each section of the Specifications shall rough -in for
the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the Specifications
or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the
Specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site
examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner
furnished equipment.
B. Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature
different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally
connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and
that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
1 16000-6 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
0707-2
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all .items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's
catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction
boxes.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways,
conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings,
supporting devices, and other accessories required.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE; AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General
Requirements. Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on
site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required
time period. Protect conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by
storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protect
PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings
B. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
The contractor shall verifv all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the
wiring system.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-1
0707-2
' PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or
galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to
Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy,
Allied or approved equivalent.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a
slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797;
conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or
approved equivalent.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial
Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL I and UL
listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or
interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride
cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit Liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri-
flex type "LA" or approved equivalent.
E. PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial
use; Carton or approved equivalent.
2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded
couplings conforming to ANSI/NEMA F131 bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with
locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet.
B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw
Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors
where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw
couplings and connectors. Couplings shall conform to ANSI/NEMA FB1. The connectors
shall have insulated throats so not to damage the insulation during wire pulling
operations.
C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA F131;
T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at connections between flexible and
rigid conduit; T & B 3112 or 3132 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat,
steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to
ANSI/NEMA F131; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections
between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon
insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
E. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 40 heavy wail, high impact rigid virgin
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL
listed for direct burial use; Carton or approved equivalent. PVC couplings and solvent
cement by the same manufacturer as the PVC conduit.
I" 16110-2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
0707-2
2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONDUIT
A. Description: Provide conduit expansion joints with internal ground and external bonding
jumper, 0-Z Type AX or approved equivalent.
2.04 WIREWAYS
A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete
with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or
approved equivalent.
B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover
which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood.
2.05 OUTLET BOXES
A. General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified.
B. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized
after fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent.
C. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB1, cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs. Crouse -Hinds,
Appleton, Pyle National or approved equivalent.
2.06 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers.
B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use
standard outlet boxes.
C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use
cabinets as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as
cabinets, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws.
2.07 SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Surface Raceway: Galvanized Steel with snap on covers, UL listed and sized as shown
on the Drawings. Finish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers, boxes and
accessories as required for a complete installation. The surface raceway shall be finished
in the manufacturer's standard buff finish. As manufactured by Wiremoid,
Walker/Parkersburg or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway
system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-3
l
0707-2
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic
tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery
and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed
unless otherwise noted.
3.03 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Underground Installations:
1. Type: Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
2. In or under slab on grade: Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
3. Minimum size: 3/4 inch.
B. Outdoor Locations Above Grade:
1. Type: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
C. Wet and Damp Locations:
1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
D. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal
conduit.
3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage:
Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS
A. Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install
raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations,
parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate
headroom.
C. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes.
Make field bends with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to
fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size. Make bends and offsets so the
inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the
same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Do not install bends or offsets in
which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
D. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
E. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and deflection
where conduit crosses control and expansion joints.
F. Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
16110-4 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
0707-2
G. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or
excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be
installed.
H. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long -and not
more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and
other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In
damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal
conduit.
I. Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit
at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. Flexible conduit
shall be'/2" minimum.
J. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam
and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and
then keep raceways at least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue
crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity
to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures.
K. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing
raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed,
seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing"
and moisture condensation within the raceways.
Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push
pennies or other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from
entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the
vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors.
M. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill
any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent
passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in
general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes.
N. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or
through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
O. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing
conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future
installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12
inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag
bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its
other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less
than 200 pounds.
3.05 JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS
A. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after
threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards,
support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized iocknuts, inside and outside.
with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are
not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in
conduit systems.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-5
r--,
i
L
0707-2
B. Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter and de -
burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely.
C. Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the
manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat of cement
to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty minutes, minimum.
D. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the
raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box.
Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one
inside and one outside the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway
or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where
chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and
tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed.
3.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but
space hangers more closely where required by conditions.
B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps
or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor.
C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized
malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4
inch and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger
material. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation.
D. Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inch are installed
above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -
removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels.
E. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4 inch are installed above
removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support
them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to
attach conduits to supporting members. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling
panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment
through the ceiling panels.
F. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations,
they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal
angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the
suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to
support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Group related
conduits together. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit.
G. Roof Mounted Conduits: Where conduits are installed on the roof, provide approved
conduit supports to lift conduit a minimum of 4" above the roof. Provide approved roof
material under the support structure as per the roofing manufacturer's warrantee
(equirements. Coordinate all work with all other affected contract divisions.
16110-6 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
0707-2
3.07 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which
conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of
Installation." Install in locations as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices,
taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Empty or Future Boxes: Provide blank coverplates for all unused boxes and boxes
indicated on the drawings to be used for future use. Coverplates shall match specified
plates in section 16140.
C. Boxes Recessed in Construction: Sheet steel boxes for stud wall construction. Rated
cast metal boxes for block wall construction.
D. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2 inch minimum depth with 3/8 inch
fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or
suspended.
E. For Wall Switches, Receptacles, Communications and Fire Alarm Use: Use 4 inch x 4
inch size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate,
except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box.
F. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep, unless
otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box.
G. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Use cast fully adjustable floor boxes for
installations in slab on grade.
K Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. Use cast outlet box in
exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations.
Location of Boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting
heights indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on
Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet
if required to accommodate intended purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes
above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
J. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified
in Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES.
K. Above Inaccessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to
allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
L. Fire Resistance: Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other
elements, using materials and methods specified.
M. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above
counters, benches, and backsplashes.
N. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats,
and similar devices.
O. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry
unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110-7
i
0707-2
P. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting
box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24
inches separation in acoustic or fire rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall
and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped
steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting
box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
Q. Ceiling Boxes and Above Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung
ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support all
boxes independently of conduit.
R. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not
use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than
required by code where job conditions so indicate.
B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit
systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set
box covers flush with finished surfaces for access.
3.09 IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate
the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number
of the wiring contained.
B. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate
the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A.,
Telephone, Data Cable, Nurse Call, Security, Closed-circuit TV, Etc.).
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. General: Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly
manner. The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are
recommended by the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint
raceway to match surface installation.
B. Usage: Surface raceways and boxes shall be installed on all existing inaccessible walls
where concealed conduit is not possible. Verify the installation of all surface raceway with
the Architect and/or Engineer prior to installation. All raceways and boxes shall be
painted to match existing wall conditions.
END OF SECTION
16110-8 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
0707-2
SECTION 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT r
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this I J
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
(
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all underground electrical
duct and direct burial conduit and pullboxes together with all other accessories required.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of the
General Requirements. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. Report concealed
damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit from corrosion and
entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes and pullboxes with
final arrangement of other utilities as determined in the field.
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.
f
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-1
L_ .
0707-2
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUITS
A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and
UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: As specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS.
2.02 PULLBOXES
A. Polymer Concrete/Fiberglass Pull Boxes: Constructed of polymer concrete and reinforced
by a heavy -weave fiberglass. Cross -ribbed, heavy-duty cover to support heavy
pedestrian or light vehicular traffic. Cover with non -slip checkered surface. Neoprene
gasket attached to cover. Size pullbox as required by NEC. Composolite "PC" style as
manufactured by Quazite or approved equal.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Underground Warning Tape: 4-inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow
with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine site to receive ducts and manholes for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the underground ducts and
manholes. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. General: Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the
work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and
approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the
Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing
the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. Perform
all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the
depths required for installation of the work under this Division.
B. Backfill Material: During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly
manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins.
Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed.
Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any
water accumulating therein by pumping.
C. Grading: Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper
installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible. Grade the bottom of
trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on
undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length.
16115-2 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT
0707-2
D. Special Conditions: Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of
trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock
excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the
trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench
excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse
gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable
soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench
bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom
grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material.
3.03 BACKFILLING
A. General: Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or
other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly
and carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or
pavement, or large boulders as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be
permissible and will be required when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled
or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill,
mound over and smooth off.
B. Beneath Pavement: Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved
as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch
layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 95% Standard
Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench
together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving
of the area immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the
trenches, grade the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the
trenches in a uniform and neat condition.
C. Surface Restoration: Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and
reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod as soon
as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling,
fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.
3.04 OPENING AND CLOSING PAVEMENT
A. General: Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other
existing pavement, including "black topping," cut the pavement as required. Hold the size
of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation
of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving
using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the
original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. General: Install conduit according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install at least 30
inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent
cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field
bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening
are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. "Snake" plastic conduit in
trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and
contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling.
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115-3
0707-2
B. Separation Between Conduits: 3 inches minimum for like services, and 6 inches minimum
between power and signal ducts.
C. Terminations: Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to
rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend
any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized
steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel
conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated
steel conduits.
D. Waterproof Wall and Floor Entrances: Install a watertight entrance sealing device with the
sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry construction with 1 or
more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to the device to make
permanently watertight.
E. Pulling Cord: Install 100-pound-test nylon cord in each conduit, including spares.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. General: Install conduit according to manufacturer's written instructions. All steel conduit
in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 0.020-inch thick
vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and
dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If
conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on
the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3 inches on both sides of joints.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF WARNING TAPE
A. General: Identify underground conduits and ducts using underground warning tape.
Install warning tape 12-inches below grade directly above all underground electrical ducts
and conduit. Install one tape per trench.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PULLBOXES
A. General: Install cast iron pullboxes in concrete pad with 4 inches minimum concrete on all
sides of pullbox. Set top of pullbox flush with concrete. Do not install pullbox in low areas
where water may stand.
END OF SECTION
16115-4 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT
i
0707-2
SECTION 16120 -CONDUCTORS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's
catalog data on conductor and insulation materials.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all
splices, connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems rated 600 volts
and less.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is
approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project
Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,
determine exact routing and lengths required.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without
weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections.
No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid.
CONDUCTORS 16120-1
i
0707-2
B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation, temperature
rated 90 degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service
f` feeders shall be type THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be type THWN-2.
C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors,
temperature rated 90 degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and
devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection
or radiant heat.
D. Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda, Simplex or approved equivalent.
2.02 JOINTS AND SPLICES
A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or
compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor
sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools.
Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable.
B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL
approved electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to
match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable.
2.03 COLOR CODING
A. General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color -coding shall
be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily
distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and
cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by
means of slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes,
outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points.
B. Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray.
Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes.
C. 208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C
respectively in the 208 volt system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 WIRE PULLING
A. Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. Pull no
conductors into conduits until all work of a nature that may cause injury to conductors is
completed.
B. Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways
or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in
conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by
pulling eyes attached directly to conductors.
16120-2 CONDUCTORS
0707-2
C. Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be
pulled in simultaneously.
D. Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for building wire No.
4 and larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their
manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used.
E. Existing Conduit: Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new conductors.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and the NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices,
insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown
on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the
tap circuit.
C. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single
conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase
wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be
installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single
conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching.
D. Wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each
outlet and wall switch.
E. Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values or as
specified in UL Standard 486A.
F. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits.
G. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled
otherwise.
H. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from
panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use
No. 12 conductors.
Different voltages in same raceway: Power and Lighting circuits of different system
voltages (e.g. 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit.
J. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet
boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint
or splice is complete, insulate it with rubber tape, and friction tape to make the insulation
of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be
used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices,
terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of insulating putty.
K. Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the
conductor manufacturer's recommendations.
CONDUCTORS 16120-3
0707-2
{ L. Identifying Labels: Adhesive vinyl cloth or vinyl self -laminating adhesive labels; stamped
to clearly identify each circuit. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. Securely fasten
labels to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, outlet boxes, wireways,
lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. Provide wire markers under the
provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
M. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using
marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than
No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups.
N. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in
accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy
galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 LISS gauge, riveted to an angle
iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For
cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type that
clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with
metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved
by the cable manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
16120-4 CONDUCTORS
0707-2
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's
catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated,
complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so
as to be operable.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Pass and
Seymour manufacture. Equivalent devices of Leviton and Eagle are also acceptable. All
other manufacturer's shall submit catalog data for engineer's approval ten days prior to
the bid date.
B. Specification Grade: All wiring devices shall be "Industrial Specification Grade", and shall
be UL listed.
2.02 COLORS
A. Light almond: All devices shall have an light almond finish where mounted in walls
finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors.
WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
i
0707-2
' 2.03 WALL SWITCHES (20 Ampere)
A. 20 Ampere Wall Switches: For all loads:
( 1. Single pole wall switch: Pass and Seymour No. 20AC1.
2. Three-way wall switch: Pass -and Seymour No. 20AC3.
3. Four-way wall switch: Pass and Seymour No. 20AC4.
4. Pilot -lighted switch: Pass and Seymour No. 20AC1-RPL.
2.04 RECEPTACLES
A. 20 Ampere Receptacles:
1. Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Pass and Seymour
No. 5362A (NEMA 5-20R).
2. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding
duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Pass and Seymour No.
2091 (NEMA 5-20R).
2.05 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES
A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast
aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Pass and Seymour No.
4510.
B. GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast
aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Pass and Seymour No.
WPFS26.
2.06 INCANDESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH
A. Incandescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular full wave solid state units with integral, quiet
on -off switches, and audible and electromagnetic noise filters. Lutron Nova-T Series NT
architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings. Where multiple dimmers are installed in a
multi -gang box, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers.
2.07 COVERPLATES
A. General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other
kindred devices.
B. Stainless Steel For Flush Mounted Devices: Coverplates in finished spaces shall be
0.040" stamped satin stainless steel. Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" or approved
equivalent.
C. Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of
same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use.
D. Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers to close
automatically when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL listed for use in damp
locations and wet locations, cover closed. Orient device to maintain watertightness.
Sierra 4500 series or approved equivalent.
16140-2 WIRING DEVICES
0707-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate mounting
heights with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate mounting heights with the
Architectural baseboard height. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be
completely covered by wall plates.
B. Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
C. Circuit Wiring: Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready
for connection to wiring devices.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in
accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level.
B. Switches: Install switches with OFF position down.
C. Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after
derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not share neutral conductor on
load side of dimmers.
D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device
grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring
devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
E. Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size plates for
outlets installed in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and
junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted
outlets.
F. Adjacent Devices* Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall switch with
circuit energized and verify proper operation. Verify that each receptacle device is
energized. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle
device for proper operation.
3.05 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General: At each GFCI receptacle location shown on the drawings install an actual GFCI
receptacle as indicated. No "feed -through" protection of GFCI receptacles shall be
permitted.
WIRING DEVICES 16140-3
0707-2
"t 3.06 ADJUSTING
A. General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number to which
the device is finally connected in indelible ink.
r
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
-' A. General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be
installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices
which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the
counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the
door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the
Architect, install devices at the following heights.
1. Wall Switch: 48 inches.
2. Receptacle: 18 inches.
3. Wall Dimmer Switch: 48 inches.
END OF SECTION
16140-4 WIRING DEVICES
0707-2
SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items according to
the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service necessary
for and incidental to equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as
specified herein.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Location of Equipment: Verify locations of equipment and location of electrical
connections prior to installation. Equipment locations are shown on Drawings in
approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete
wiring system.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of equipment and electrical
connections.
EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-1
I_
0707-2
r_
1.07 COORDINATION
A. General: Coordinate work under provisions of the General Requirements. Obtain and
review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment
furnished under other sections. Determine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequence of Construction: Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with
installation schedule for equipment. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with
start-up schedule for equipment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide electrical equipment and materials as specified under other sections of
this Specification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Connections: Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and
energization.
C. Thermostats: Verify the location of all thermostats in the field.
3.02 EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. General: Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing,
kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by
the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications.
B. Locations: Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no
indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the
Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions, for the
scope of connections, to equipment furnished by them, and for the exact locations of all
items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -
in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit
preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job.
C. Disconnect Switches: Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided
integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide
and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or
indicated.
3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Connections: Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use
liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
1 16180-2 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS
0707-2
C. Wiring: Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment.
D. Receptacles: Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is required
by the manufacturer. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is
indicated.
E. Strain Relief: Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at
outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
F. Devices: Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as
indicated or as required.
G. Interconnections: Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and
equipment where indicated or required.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS 16180-3
0707-2
j
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's
catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of electrical
materials, equipment and installations.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates (Normal Systems): Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment
of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16 inch
thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at
least 1" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of
the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings.
B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16-inch black letters on white background. Use
only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles.
2.02 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Adhesive vinyl cloth or self -laminating vinyl adhesive labels. Thomas & Betts
type WBC or WEC or approved equivalent. Pre-printed, typewritten or field printed.
Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, switchboard gutters, wireways, pull
boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1
0707-2
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually installed.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
PART
3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to
equipment front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on
panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
3.03
EQUIPMENT
A. General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved
nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Panelboards.
2. Main Switches.
3. Main Circuit Breakers.
3.04
CONTROL DEVICES
A. General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All
electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment
served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the
following:
1. Contactors.
2. Relays.
3. Disconnect Switches.
END OF SECTION
f"
16195-2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
t
0707-2
Iv ,.
SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing.
C. Utility Drawings: Submit for review Utility Company prepared drawings.
1.03 SCOPE
A. General: The work shall include all labor, material and equipment for the complete
electrical service from the power company service point to the building service entrance
equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install, an electrical service of the
size indicated on the drawings.
1.04 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICE
A. General: Do not interrupt the existing electrical service. Locate the existing underground
feed to the building and mark its location in the vicinity of digging operations. Caution the
other workers as to the location of the service.
1.05 SERVICE INTERRUPTION
A. General: Any service interruptions necessary in parts of the building for change over to
the new service shall be done only with permission of the owner. Submit requests for
power interruptions to the owner 48 hours in advance of when needed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Utility Company Requirements: Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written
requirements.
- 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-1
0707-2
1.08 UTILITY FEES
A. General: All service requirements shall be verified with the Power Company prior to the
bid date and all additional costs (if any) shall be included in Contractor's bid price.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Location of Service Transformers: Verify locations of service transformers prior to
excavating for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. Description: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DUCTS.
2.02 UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. Description: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DUCTS.
2.03 SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS
A. Description: As specified under Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Equipment: Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.
a_E
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to
the Project. t-=
B. Coordination: Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access
is available.
3.03 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Underground Service from pole: The Utility Company will provide and install a
transformer assembly on a pole approximately where shown. Furnish and install service
entrance conductors of the size shown beginning at weatherproof condulet fittings
located on the service pole where and as directed by the Power Company and then
installed in conduit extending down the pole, thence underground to the service _
equipment. All connections on the service pole will be made by the Power Company.
16400-2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
(
i ;•
j
t
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
0707-2
METERING
A. Base for direct meter by electrical contractor: Furnish and install on the wall shown, a
weatherproof meter base of the type and size as directed by the Utility Company. The
metering instrument will be furnished and inserted into the base by the Power Company.
SYSTEMS OF WIRING
A. 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase. 4W system:
1. Electrical Service: Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for
lighting and power.
2. Power Feeders: 208 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted.
3. Lighting Feeders: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.
4. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for the contractor or as
required to properly serve the load.
LOAD BALANCING
A. General: The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the various
phases. When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be
run on the "hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel and any unbalance shall be
corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum
unbalance of 10%) in amperes.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. General: As specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT
A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DUCTS.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. General: Install as specified under Section 16115 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DUCTS.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400-3
0707-2
SECTION 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide switch ratings.
enclosure type and dimensions.
C. Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified
herein.
1.03 SCOPE:
A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and
incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
B. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of disconnect
switches on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their
required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above
grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Location of Disconnect Switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior to
installation. Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system.
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-1
0707-2
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Description: NEMA KS1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
Handle lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise;
quick make, quick break. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated.
B. Size: Provide disconnect switches as indicated on the drawings. Provide minimum rating
to meet or exceed the rating of the circuit protection device for the branch circuit.
C. Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the
weather; elsewhere in NEMA I general-purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are
required.
D. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class RK1 fuses.
E. Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide
auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in
starters.
F. Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, Westinghouse or Square D
manufacture, equivalent to Square D Class 3110 Heavy Duty Safety Switches.
2.02 TUMBLER SWITCHES:
A. Description: Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as
within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches
as unfused disconnects; Square D Class 2510 or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb.
B. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NECA
"Standard of Installation."
C. Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated
and as instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including
screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values or as specified in UL Standard 486A.
D. Fuses: Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of
each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
r 16441-2 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
0707-2
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each disconnect switch to identify
the load being served, voltage and upstream power source. Provide engraved plastic
nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
B. Main Devices: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify main devices. Provide
engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION.
END OF SECTION
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16441-3
0707-2
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data for
grounding electrodes and connections.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit for review Contractor's Field Tests of installation. Indicate
overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in
accordance with the National Electrical Code.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSIINFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ROD ELECTRODE
A. Ground Rods: 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long copper clad steel ground rod.
B. Manufacturers: Ground rods shall be as manufactured by Blackburn or approved
equivalent.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-1
0707-2
2.02 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Pipe Clamps: Cast Bronze, heavy-duty, sized to match water pipe, as manufactured by
Blackburn Series J or approved equivalent.
B. Structural Steel Connectors: Copper clad steel, 3/4" diameter by 5 minimum grounding
lug, as manufactured by Burndy Type GSTUD-HY or approved equivalent. Weld lug to
structural member.
C. Rod Clamps: Cast of high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy, UL listed for direct
burial, as manufactured by Blackburn Number JAB 34H or approved equivalent.
2.03 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Exothermic Connections: Molds, welding metal, tools, and all accessories shall be from
the same manufacturer. All connections shall be made as directed by the manufacturer's
instructions. Molds shall not be altered in the field. Exothermic connections shall be made
by the CADWELD or approved equivalent process.
2.04 CONDUCTORS
A. Material: Stranded copper as specified in Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. General: Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in
accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional
requirements. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code
Tables 250-94 and 250-95.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a
common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting
means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment
ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding electrode conductor
without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system as described below.
C. Grounding Electrode System: The following items shall be bonded together by the
grounding electrode conductor to form the grounding electrode system.
1. Metal Underground Water Pipe: Connect to the main water service pipe with an
approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before
connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric fitting
occurs on water main, connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the
fitting. Bond the metallic conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide
and install with ground clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the
water meter.
2 Metal Frame of Building: Connect to the effectively grounded structural steel
frame of the building with a copperclad steel grounding lug as specified welded to
the steel member. Connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an
approved compression connection.
3. Concrete -encased Electrode: Connect to a 1/2" minimum steel reinforcing bar
located in the concrete foundation or footing in contact with earth for a minimum
16450-2 GROUNDING AND BONDING
0707-2
of twenty feet with a #4 copper conductor by means of an exothermic weld
connection. Extend the conductor and connect to the grounding electrode
conductor with an approved compression connection.
D. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: Supplement the grounding electrode system with an
additional electrode that shall be 10' long by 3/4-inch diameter copperclad steel ground
rod. Bond the supplemental grounding electrode to the service equipment ground with #6
copper conductor.
3.02 GROUND RODS
A. General: Locate ground rods a minimum of one rod length from each other and at least
one rod length away from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with
bare #6 copper conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare cable
ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise
indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the
steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade.
B. Ground Wells: Install ground rods in ground wells where indicated on the Drawings.
3.03 GROUNDING BUILDING STEEL
A. General: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service
grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code
Section 250-94(a). The grounding conductor shall be connected to building steel using a
grounding lug as specified above welded to the building steel.
3.04 GROUNDING RACEWAYS
A. General: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all
conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur,
provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -
insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible.condu'it. Install a separate green -
insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all
service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers,
panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such
bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding
strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-66.
3.05 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. General: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation
of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit
indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase
and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet
boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways
occur; provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors
to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the
end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault
back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of
these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-66.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16450-3
0707-2
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action
or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and
make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as
red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic Weld Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for
underground connections. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex
surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Terminations: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws
and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or to
values specified in UL 486A and 486B.
D. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended
by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard
method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed
on the ground conductor.
3.07 GROUND RESISTANCE TESTING
A. General: Upon completion of the grounding electrode system and before connection to
the permanent facility power, the electrical contractor shall provide a certified
measurement of the earth grounding electrode resistance. The testing shall utilize an
earth resistance meter and shall be conducted in accordance with the IEEE Standard 3-
point fall of potential method. The minimum length of the test conductors shall be 300
feet. Grounding electrode resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. The contractor shall
immediately notify the Owner's representative if the measurement exceeds 5 ohms.
END OF SECTION
16450-4 GROUNDING AND BONDING
f
1
0707-2
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide complete
catalog data and drawings on all items of. equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings for review. Submit shop
drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication. Drawings shall
indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices;
dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus
and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the
drawings and specifications.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance
manuals for items specified herein. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.03 PRE -APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. General: All requests for substitute panelboards/switchboards shall be submitted to the
engineer no fewer than ten calendar days prior to the bid opening. The substitution
proposal shall be bound, manufacturer's catalog data in alphabetical order by equipment
Type, and a cross index clearly indicating all proposed substitutions. Engineer's review is
only to establish the suitability of the manufacturer and the equipment series. If approved
by the Engineer, the substitution shall be listed in an addendum. The substituted
equipment are still subject to Engineer's review as described elsewhere in this section.
B. Listed Manufacturers: Pre -approval of manufacturers listed in the products section of this
specification is not required.
1.04 SCOPE:
A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and
incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and
all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
11 PANELBOARDS 16470-1
0707-2
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
C. Main Panelboard: The building main panelboard shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment."
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of panelboards on
site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required
time period. Deliver panelboards in factory fabricated water resistant wrapping. Protect
panelboards from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from
the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Store and protect in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material
components, enclosure and finish.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Field Measurements: Verify that_fie!d measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Location of Panelboards: Verify locations of panelboards prior to installation. Panelboards
are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate
as required to complete electrical distribution system.
1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of panelboards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of
sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinets shall be rigidly constructed of sheet
steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners
overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet fronts shall be cut from
single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by
adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface
mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted.
B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X or 12 as indicated on the
Drawings or as required.
C. Cabinet Doors: Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and
catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with
T_handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Provide with metal
directory frame mounted inside each panel door.
D. Cabinet Finish: All back boxes shall be galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts,
primed and finished in gray lacquer.
16470-2 PANELBOARDS
0707-2
E.
E. Multiple Sections: Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42
branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes
bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not
i more than 42 branch overcurrent devices.
F. Branch Circuits: Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the
device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space
only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size
of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load,
provide the device complete for operation. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully
interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. Connect all circuit interrupting devices
with sequence phasing.
G. Copper Panelboard Bus: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars. Provide each
panelboard with a separate equipment copper grounding bus bar bonded to the
panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an
isolated copper grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet.
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as
scheduled, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled.
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolted in circuit breakers as described in Section 16475 -
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES.
C. Manufacturers: Panels shall be Square D, General Electric, Cutler Hammer manufacture
or pre -approved equal, equal to the Square D panels listed below.
1. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: Square D type NQOD with QOB, QOBH
or QOBVH circuit breakers as required.
2. Panelboards for 480 volts Service: Square D type NF with EDB, EGB, or EJB
circuit breakers as required to 125 amps. Type KA or KH subfeed circuit
breakers up to 225 amps.
D. Hinged Trim Construction: Both trims must employ a hinged inner and outer door giving
easy access to circuit breaker handles and gutter space.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, NECA "Standard of
Installation", and the manufacturer's written instructions. Install panelboards plumb. Install
recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in
accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupters."
C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no
more than 4 inches above floor.
D. Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
PANELBOARDS 16470-3
0707-2
t
E. Circuit Directory: Provide a neatly typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit I
panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase
loads. Identify branch circuits with room numbers to match those finally posted on doors.
Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. Provide an electronic copy of the final
circuit directories to the Owner with submission of Owner's Operations Manuals.
F. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each panelboard ,to identify the
panelboard name, voltage and upstream power source. Provide engraved plastic
nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
G. Main Devices: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the main devices on each
distribution panelboard and lighting panelboard. Provide engraved plastic nameplates
under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
H. Circuit Labels: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the circuits on each
distribution panelboard. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of
Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
Spare Conduits: Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an
accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each
as SPARE.
J. Grounding: Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16450.
K. Fuses: Install fuses as specified in all fused switches.
L. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding
connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
102 ADJUSTING
A. Load Balancing: Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder;
rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent of
each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits.
END OF SECTION
16470-4 PANELBOARDS
Jo
0707-2
r
SECTION 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
-- Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data sheets
showing electrical characteristics including time -current curves.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance
manuals for items specified herein. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
L-- all operation and maintenance manuals.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary
for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Fuse Pullers: Provide two fuse pullers.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish under provisions of the General Requirements.
B. Spare Fuses: Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3
fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each size of each type of fuse
used. These spare fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement
fuses blown during construction and testing.
ICIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1647 5-1
0707-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FUSES
A. General: Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and
in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch.
B. Fuse Identification Label: Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the
required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses.
C. Regulatory Standards: Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be
UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes
listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are
applied.
D. Installation: Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any
equipment until the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to
energizing the equipment.
E. Fuse Reducers: Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by
the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses.
F. Class and Type: Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type
designations referring to those indicated on the plans.
1. Class RK-1 Time Delay (1-600 Amps): Class RK-1; Bussmann Type LPN or LIDS
"Low Peak". Fuses shall be available in ratings 1-600 amperes, shall be current
limiting dual element with time delay, and shall have interrupting rating of
200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be equipped with slotted
blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection
feature.
2.02 MOLDED CASE THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, one, two and three pole, with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers
with common trip and single operating handle. Handle ties between breakers are
unacceptable. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and trip rating scheduled or
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with
quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication.
C. Trip Elements: Thermal magnetic trip element calibrated for 40-deg. C. ambient
temperature.
D. Terminations: Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60
degree C. or 75 degree C. conductors. Terminations for breakers 35 ampere and greater
shall be UL listed for use with 75 degree C conductors.
E. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere
interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings.
F. Switching Duty: UL listed SWD for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole, suitable
for 120 volts ac fluorescent loads.
16475-2 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
0707-2
G. HACR Listing: UL listed as HACR type, 120/240 volt, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three
pole, to serve heating air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Provide circuit
breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
H. HID Lighting Circuits: Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits shall be specifically
t designed for HID circuits.
I. Accessories: Provide circuit breakers with switching neutral, shunt trip, ground fault
current interrupters, or remote controlled operators as scheduled on the drawings.
J. Motor Circuit Protectors: Where indicate on the Drawings or Specified elsewhere provide
molded case circuit breaker with integral instantaneous magnetic trip element in each
pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fuses: Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fuse Labels: Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are
easily read.
C. Circuit Breakers: Install circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475-3
0707-2
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Include manufacturer's
catalog data and drawings on all interior and exterior lighting fixtures with separate sheet
for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed
fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture
submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of
utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual
comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution
curves, and any other data required by the Architect/Engineer for every type fixture.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's
installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance
instructions for each product.
1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's
name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any
substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No
substitution shall be made without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole judge
of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the
Engineer. If requested by the engineer, the contractor shall provide samples of each
proposed substitution for review. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer,
the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture.
1.04 APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: The contract will be on the basis of materials scheduled on the drawings without
consideration of possible substitute of "or -equal" items. Application for the acceptance of
substitute lighting fixtures will not be considered until after the effective date of the
agreement. Submit requests for substitute materials under provisions of the General
Conditions and the General Requirements. Approval for lighting fixture substitution shall
not be given prior to the bid opening.
LIGHTING 16500-1
i-
i
0707-2
1.05 CATALOG NUMBERS
A. General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the
catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals,
prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for.
1.06 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary
for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of lighting fixtures on site
and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time
period. Protect lighting fixtures from degradation by storing above grade protected from
the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Lighting fixtures shall remain in factory
protective shipping cartons until installation.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate location of
lighting fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the
architectural reflected ceiling plan and other architectural features.
B. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for the
installation of recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Verify ceiling
system type and provide suitable plaster ring or frame if required.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. General: Provide extra materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections. Deliver extra materials in factory packing.
B. Lamps (One Standard Carton): At the completion and acceptance of the work provide
and deliver to the owner 1 standard carton, or a minimum of 12 replacement lamps of
each lamp type. The lamps shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location
designated by the owner.
16500-2 LIGHTING
0707-2
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown.
Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified
herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same
type as used in rooms of similar usage.
2.02 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. General: All exterior mounted lighting fixtures shall be UL listed for wet locations where
installed in direct contact with weather and UL listed for damp locations where installed
protected from weather.
2.03 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and
acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types
scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; General
Electric, Phillips, Sylvania or pre -approved equivalent.
B. Incandescent A Lamps: Medium base, inside frosted unless scheduled or recommended
otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V, 750 hour minimum.
C. Incandescent R Lamps: Medium base, reflector flood or spot as scheduled or
recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V, 2000 hour
minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are
diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures
shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Install
surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each
other. Secure to prevent movement. For lay -in ceilings install a structural member to span
two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. Do not suspend fixtures from
lay -in ceiling panels.
C. Continuous Rows: Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be
straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be
visible.
D. Wall Mounted Fixtures Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit
signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. Coordinate the locations with
architectural wall elevations and with architectural features.
E. Exit Signs: Install surface mounted exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
LIGHTING 16500-3
t_=
I
r
0707-2
F. Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
G. Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16110 -
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building
wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. Bond products
and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H. Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
I. Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to
meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper
connection and operation.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed.
B. Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A. General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. Remove
dirt and debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by
manufacturer. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
16500-4 LIGHTING
0707-2
SECTION 16915 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide dimensions,
size, voltage ratings and current ratings.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions.
Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit for review Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions. Include
instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary
for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of the
General Requirements. Accept delivery of equipment on site and inspect for damage.
Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from
corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits
controlled on project record documents.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 16915-1
_._.
I
i.
0707-2
}
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES (CONTACTORS)
A. Description: The remote control switches shall be of the single coil, electrically operated,
mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks,
latches, or semi -permanent magnets. The switches shall be listed under UL 508. They
shall be fully rated and marked for use with ballast lighting, tungsten, and general use
loads. Provide the contactor with 120-volt coil and installed in NEMA 1 enclosure.
& Contacts: Main contacts shall be silver alloy and shall be self aligning with renewable
from the front of the panel. The switches shall be continuously rated 30 amps at 600 volts
AC and shall have an interrupting capacity of 300% of rated current at 0.4 to 0.5 power
factor. Provide the number and arrangement of contacts as shown on the drawings.
C. Manufacturers: Switches shall be ASCO 917 or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each contactor and timeswitch to
identify the device, the location of the lighting fixtures being controlled, and the power
source. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 -
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.
END OF SECTION
i 16915-2
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
A NEW SIMUNITIONS FACILITY for the
LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
•
L Y
WE
L.P.D.
ACADEMY RIFLE
& FIRING RANGE
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
ARCHITECTS:
INDEX TO DRAWINGS — 2/12/2008
MWM PROJECT If 0707-2
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
SITEWORK
STRUCTURAL
2574 74th STREET SUITE 201
,,��66�� �.�
�q'A.
SPIA SITE PUN
SNOA
GENERAL NOTES
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
SP1.2 SITE DETAILS
SIA
FOUNDATION PUN
(806) 745-7707
S2.1
FOUNDATION DETAILS
^
re lt+
OF
ARCHITECTURAL
S2.2
TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS
A1.1 FLOOR PUNS AND FINISH SCHEDULE
S4•+
S4.1
SECOND FLOOR FRAYING PLAN
FLOOR FRAMING DETAILS
CONSULTANTS:
A1.2 REFLECTED CEILING PUNS
ss.,
FRAMING
ROOF FRRAYING PLAN
A1.3 ROOF PLAN
U
S6.1
ROOF FRAYING DETAILS
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
A2.1 DOORLSAMWINDOW SCHEDULE WITH
DETAI
S6.2
STAIR DETAILS
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
2574 74th STREET SUITE 201
A3.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION S
A4.1 BUILDING SECTION
ELECTRICAL
ES+•+ SITE PUN
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
µ,2 BUILDING SECTION
Et.t
FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PUN
(806) 745-7707
µ.3 WALL SECTIONS
E2.1
DETAILS
E=
DETAILS
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
3223 S. LOOP 289
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423
(806) 799-0753
SET
ILWMarchitects
MVWM Amhl
vim. tsos>ru.rmr
F-")M7M
F—twSposom
F— (M)M-4
00
PO
.961TE PLAN
7Z
Vc,
n• gee. 1. "- -� 1-
�va<• Yw-n
za'• .cc aNn+w
RIXY SRl: �u• Ph u.'%Y^ N W.vC PnNVfr
-rc aNa.¢c Row
�azRwTe.
��bJW: SET
'a WHEEL STOP Tw.
tick sc r . r-v
E6L^D a+D BC4^..ER asa+ -
�a..araoxna wu•= TT��,,
•cCa¢2a�OWfL�E 1 v
utaC aN �rGNJ TO YanRK 1l
>PnCC9. N&[M' 9txxxa
uP. fXaf'm T 9GN ;•
V.iPD is YMRK '
?aK.LE SPnaF I r
rv<G*!'. YIN-M.Y�Ei
- maTE
E.aCNa >!O 9atYER . GRCCtlI 11
/9-70DIIE f�
axv. STCfI "vEE s)
�i v t0• %. 3aaa V-1 1
'al•C. w0 0 aT
a� �ov �,cvwa�x
RRa 0.,as_ . wa.Pa�Na oa
PROS .� EeGf:15�IXP FK.N Crir aT u,C. PnM'.\YJ
;, - Ryay 90E ap y.y w, 9'RFCP a:L,N59 .ft1E
_0 ACCES15LE PARKING SIGNAGE
y
e• � aMU cy GS+Ca1:R!
^E NO Twui rR '�u�x n W > C✓vn�.'*Y.J Anv
cas�cac :.ice ccixe:� (j
fa>L A. alA. altaiaC. IXLH eaMP9. 'w. I --�.
Pwttev sPac:_�irF. •• ..,.•,,,— >Fw• b,9<v Yn�. 1 �\ �\\ `,i
�•tleLC4� 9TUBdL Gn — I l\T 4...�`: !\�\\, � L`x"v_"J
g ACCESSIBLE PARKING PROVISIONS
saEw �Toaea
cxie:a= FavNa Na-u 9n K9 w•".w a a �+o�e^
rz
aY'C2 CGX.'RC f.
>,�, a # . .�.K rnN; - •. tl;. � sE>•.wY aEP� � � a -.a > 5� _ R i
H
PEPe'Rc 2, eQ �Pe •Fe<a,, -- 4-T.,:'r
' ( I... Ii'ryl
YS.TI.Y TAK`F"�s'�I—� �'�ew•.e++aRCNc� �h�l�,jl�=!!1=1'�=1.j.�-,l-i'' �nuwI I{ (,�
j— ' � I �w c. veuvcE reER y
I �(�DETAIL —F TYPICAL IL CALCum _�1DETAECPAasor ory a soEwaK
05
WHEEL STOP TTP. _ DETAIL TYP. TLRN DOWN _ DETAIL CONTROL jONT AT SCeWALK _es, DETAIL F,AGPOLE FOOTNG
—�^ � � 3Ga..N r' . � O' a _. 5Pv) tiLa`4• r - r •s •-a:n.•: r . ,.,.
�wnn
tects
MWM A.MtaeN6 ice.
u�a Tan sY«Y. sw.mT
LuORwM,h l9123
Flmbb.'. (8)7) 7 .TmT
Fas (boP)'/aiTBlo
♦r OP tb•"�
AgNlw Ine.
C sitlbq NWwtlnl♦
E4 MW
LT339.W
M. 9uh ]m
LUE- (. Toa m
v CCU
p0
00
c
0 1
E� a
CL
Q U. E
a
.—
c aA
_o
y
AO
YI Y
� 3
J
wxxnApex, o��ra-zR
P.. SFp- 2
ROOM FNrSH §R�tDJLE
f
-F-LooRs
BASF
_WALLS
CELW, HEr�4T
"I AIAFl
NOTES
ELI WM
�archftcts
MWM Archbacts, Im
t 74 7ft S ,SWb MI
Ftwn
F— (M)746.iR0
* Ag.nm.,.
c.,..ft�.
EMobbl Egw—
=s.LooPmsuft=
Luolcd. u T9133
F : (m)m.P/S]
%I 00
PO
*0
c
E
Ck L16
c
tq 19
a q.
0 •
IL IL
c
E
0-
.j
2-4 PLUS" MID. L r� M.
PANTED %" GYP.
RC, ELEC
CE), WLNG,15OMT
0 RECESSED CAN LOW
WALLS LIZ, DUO TIOWT
FIX PL ELEC.
To DECK
IE EXIT LT. FIX,
RE: ELEC,
RCP LEGEND
RCP SECOND FLOOR RCP GROUND FLOOR
—, "r -, , PT, � - -
ffi6w
architectsm
MWVM Amhltecft, 1—
Tx
F." (R.)7,5.7m
*0
C
0
E
OF
Ck.
Q U.
0
C
0,
-0
Al2
Lubbock Police Deparment
Simunitions Facility
City of Lubbock Police Department Firing Range
Lubbock, Texas
e
s
l HIM 9=
\ I
11
r�i r
Y
J
. GW6E a5 tl'1CJtaE9 cuSE aS 'sC, 4C0
IF,u is cc—
(- I
FC., tiE• -* .'.� G'afNSi;.^v£ FSkW
BR.a:Ka+ v.A'AC'W:G
0 [%U'.W aNJ kTDpvS 1
� xa:n, .w4A'MS
bFIF
i wx Fta•e
. z - '�.• -..c =orc+.ec vx+.o.v ..+waw c�oxr ua_a Pa.w ^ -^act eo a hoar s m o:xw ay �m �.a.
um Aw x 9aneasrPc+w. m o PaN. �� ur;...oW .rrav
AS CGt'CTE">. .GCx 8aa EA6. rvM a .. „
. unn�a...r CiRRarpA rn[tAt roA.P .Eix w '
FHSI4ED WOLLOW METAL DOOR AND WNDOW SCWEDLA.E
ecau:� v<• . ro� r,xa�� veep. vaM• aw ?a.aBr o009 eze3< .c nr W _. .._..... __..
4M riOCQ .W,rt
cceP ns soeo. ,� Dote A, sa:.c.
ea s�
AHEAD DEfAL a -JAMB DETAIL
f ZxG n3 30YD
}�
�o~�
�Ar �.�• �. U _. �w Wau
A
O.0 30pG CWTve —�
�=• W1CtlW r4� na 6
t'Aa.Y AS SC'.i:O. C'.Cn'. SEALANT
i 2 Cu JCC ^F
au Ww
rr.Aac as xaev �� �
�4-EAD DETAIL T"`}t _
116wm
architects
MWM Arehieeela, I-
-.TAns9 s mr
Wee .T. ream
P— (e96)T16.=
Fa.. (80B)IIS.rem
� OF
Agnew Ine.
c�wu��m�ne.
=s. woo me, sraaaam
� T. ream
Ph— (ee9)799.07
Fug (exlrec.mu
to
i
E Z
a'
u c ad
0 it 3 '�
Ye
� 3
v E
A y `o
A w
3
J
JL��
Ftmc OW745.,
�
�Mw��
Fac f1011iW10H
OCR
PO
-
r.
46-
M ATWM
Ll I— YYYYArchkmcbk 116
251--
F— MX)M7M
parr II .1 e-Ile
tmpo4Uyow
Plio moww]p1/
00
%VO
oc/
rtviouo 75
40
rf
IM6
IL d6
E
T
—gBL&DW, secs
A4.1
.........
7
Mwm
�architects
MVVMA,Chk.&A ft-
w.7— S� �'z
Lam. T. r
a : (M)USIM
rr oc�
�PO
A4.2
LEqy......
Lwm
12
architects
MWM AmMUcts, fta
�,Fev
*.
.—o XN T-
:,
Ag— k-
c..wftmmhftm.
m3s�m.
3bwl
ocue
7V\
777
J!
Po
c
CL
u
mom_
fa
10 U.
41 0) 1
Fr
J
6
IL -4
C at
SECTION
.(PWAH
E
0 .
.0
A
A4.3
;E�`9���Et ' Eppt aa E� �+� �t 3�� t■iSs 3 � P� P t � E� ����� �@� ���� �EQyE§[ E� ��$�' g/'$���A`^E�`��
tti,� $ A8P C � rY "�Pl E�� eg Pg� a � ���YYgg qa� �* $a = % t � t S• T
1i,
it
i PP gp +g
jig
Pl
t t
3 $" sit PR It F •Yn8sJ M YY 181=oYY BYi3' Hi
z
eS.T� � >y� 9 n a a o •� {$.�5����� an •a �9qi
�3����t� t$ e § 9=•t E 8� �� � aEi ��f
��' a3R� P'J�jjj�rt��gg�� �g7i�� �1� �■a�E���t i'� , � !Pt
glE!ail
rt' t r g�EPPg�it Yt ;P
tg y§ a 1E
q;iygPx .� fill, 1 E
t� 1 !� •i as i E Y'� r� gt P �� �.
Lubbock Police De arment
(n
Z�; Simunitions FacilityIMEOil
._
City of Lubbock Polies Department Firing Range �0
Lubbock, Texas
muwm
�architects
MWM Archhectik Ift
2574 7N S 8 MI
WCOoh. T 7ln
IM )74$,M7
71085
11
sen
ctl-..
wm Amhftd%
25747. 3n mi
Lubbock. T. M
� jm)m—
F- (M)USIM
IL wt-I I-M V
r�
ne au sm, w„u �,r mrouaoa ar r oc m,e..:
c e�wea� t w re.r ea,o eaw.� ore am
ii wo .e e�.cpe� �r °er°Nacce �1
�A$Qa$QP Y jl.
zT
eay. »� oeo�r
�r
ees n.r u.ca.m rnoma s®A..r
i41TYPKAL W CMU FDM Q: TYPICAL EXT.
suaa 1� • ro-L! • ry ec.le�'! • w
ml
y era--- * r7
>sQ A..H ea a..r
4 COMT. FTG AT CM b SPPZAD FTG AT COL UMM
ecaa, �! • rc euaa y! • ro-
yl I I I —
IL
J/ fomue
..e err. e.ae roam mae re woara
roorn�io e�nn. .. ow,ne '1" ,� ru�su�mle�' .e Mr w«b�t 3
4NRM2 .t. WaWY4iCVf AT ewe � Np T� Ali d
,tac o�,ou� qN .1 • .�. � � 8 �—
rc eoo 6�xr me �l ers 0 a• as �p0�
ca+.0 eio w:r h roorw
>� olu, eea oun
THICKERID SLAB TYPICAL
6 AT CM PAR 7 SPRE.AD FTG AT PLASTER 0 EXTERIOR SLAB 9 TYPCAL HXT210R FOOTCIG
'-.' � *�! . ro- acre r•! . ro- ecrs L! . w er..0 w - ro-
_Y.u—��.� I _l,_. I�-etm couiwa
FFII 1f AA e� �
rna mar ewe
eee aa. e.c� o.F
N E'JCT. COL U MM POOTWG
We *--
�TWM
ibDcts
wam AtOft da, b-
2e741� e�
L�
P1,onc180lNKT
Fec feoeY� ]�
2.rr.er
rrel war.oK wwti
ueeoa, r.ww
reww: AOeNMamr
Pee (lD6Y.5.'/mo
v 00C�
pp���
rV
L
m
A
� s
V
� 0 �
O � L
V E
3
J
OR F 01*€�
ViA p�
t
-
II
3p� 4g[
Y3)µ
5 ?
p��
D D D
104
D
4 qj
�ryax f
> till
p
°f�{'�' " Lubbock Police Deparment vttl r''
CO �� { 3imunitions Facility City of Lubbock Police Department Firing Rxngs
Lubbock, Texas
C!1♦0
I rp-
y
'—r
y p
-
c
�
1
i
1
I
I
S
i
_)
o-nKe.�re
fl
y—
-
------ -----
ki
o
j
;r
I
Lubbock Police Deparment=1
Simunitions Facility
City of Lubbock Pollee Department Firing flange
Lubbock, Texas 3
I�
c N
A
�i` 'i E Lubbock Police Deparment aglg
� rill E � Simunitions Facility °
City of Lubbock Police Dopartnnent Moll Range �� ?� —•
Lubbock,Texas 3
6
�
f/
] £■/\$\� Lubbock Police Deparmen! f /
aR k2:
•§ S■munNi ns Facility
City _ Lubbock Police Deportment Firing Kong*
. !Lubbock,Toxas
$� f
gig
ta
g;
>X
A Al JAI
I I if I
Lubbock Police Deparment I(
H 9
Simunitions Facility
fif L&!
I City of Lubbock Police Department Firing Range
it" Lubbook,Toxas
I
.0u
corwen= vertu
7
TO SIRN3@t
STAR —ST.
STAR
aSTAIR TO SLAB CIONN t--r\Twr.ALSTAR cowvicnoti
W-- \,*&V ecA+e , -, - -
r3-*,\STAIR LAmpm
r4-'\STAIR LAM MG
/-S-'\WiT. STMISER AT LANDHG
euie• r - ro•
W— r - ra
kIW —, - - -
rnowL wapar
cormeTe WrtM
GMMYYwYI. W.WF.
LUpa�
PG I4Ol
C9Jl AT
C O.C.
co�a+� II¢.µ. uem To asnt ro¢ � ursnoa
� TO —1.
--'\
STRMER AT LANDM r7"\STRMre
ER SUPPORT "\ STP,"WR AT BEAM 9 LAMM FRAMM
' Prom
T.
TYPICAL STAR OCr6T.
TYPICAL STEEL STEEL CoRA'rING STEEL STAR
MSTARZ COhSM=110M 11 LAMDM MAMM 412)STRMMMZ TO LAMM
\§W — r - - \,OAY —, - - s—r.-
MEWM
�architects
MVM Architectih 1n
T.T9tM
F-(W6)745.7GM
Strumml Englnw
I-IM)M.7m
V, OCR.
86.2
SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL
� I - . .1 0 �
luvvm
architects
PA Architects, Inc.
2V4 TAtl, s-sWM 41
UT 3
'e'r7N ---T—
A04EW AAL �.7m BicMIM
E811a.
.----.,----.-----.-.-______________-----__,______.-----_____
I
O � 1
('�'� (.�--F :•-.-�»- ; Lam' � 1
;i , n
1 w bu"a 0�
str
P I
I
I
O
--------------------------------------------
/
FLOOR PLAN - SECOND FLOOR - ELECTRICAL _
,ac ur• v/ ra NOTES INDICATED BY "Q"
La.T,ab a s w.11 d�,.sP a,+xs ro umc rmc •"• I'll r,ruas.
Kw P.xl •w,-.
,xi,xwbll m�oPEueP -+x n> �.dru,Ecaul rd 6EwK'x u,-,b-+:ue. ww
,ii,r.'rtion]'o�i rawm.'rs:nn acriixd�o",oEa�s�wEE wu> �,rc`m
�w1°ONrrmww, s°wr,*rc°„ ,wiurco"riv wrt� ESXr wdw.,w Lx.�,=iw. cc«
a. SPSf K p,rEd 4uP .OILS p:N P—. Liprt Td CpImIX. 1 rtOW MO wa
txMi �p�.,i dxra fA,i �CKS wtiw WCb DES dN Wib p+l'P,ES,
v L bw,i T Cp+lKt Ca1i,<t<R 'dt •.
]. Y wKL 1 ECN:fKE CNT,CTM •d]'.
] /`] '."T.'
/tG?rax o/]' mKV�i Td diWLb bwi i<b wi[d by ML[ ,.
a+."v .T.'] Td Cd,ibp. Si,IAGi Lt<bi,K.
,,. ]� Wr6V,T rW rNup[ fl[<ixiCK. ,bdiµl ]-0' OUTS,ce BV itO,wd uN W.
I
FLOOR PLAN - FIRST FLOOR - ELECTRICAL
0Ck.
Po
C wn
WIRING DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS -TYPICAL
PANEL IOENTIPICATION DETAIL
no macs
ELECTRICAL SYMBOL SCHEDULE
Qu.a .cuweme .�an,xo r,nor - mi � un.�. ,mm
Qi � s n�num...wrrw r,mac .,Mum.. w.i - rnr � nxw. ,mre
® ru eox re.
SERVICE GROUNDING DETAIL
m¢:f
PANELBOARD BONDING DETAIL
BELOW GRADE CONDUIT BURIAL DETAIL
�� cn f'11
%ThYx .1A', PIIOIBLT M0. nl.M
=.Uawt"!
IIAIABId Architect, Inc.
ssTe 74N sm summl
UmC .T.>,
Pl—, (M)745 M
ru (sce)ru—
wwE2.1
d
li
F
ME
F.
g
1
p ,� ��
t, f ? t, Lubbock Police De arment a Simunitions Facility too
!?6' o
t N N t g City of Lubbock Police Department Firing Range
pie Lubbock,Texas n